SmartPlant P&ID

Creating a P&ID Course Guide

Version 2009 SP3 October 2011 DPID2-TP-100027B

Copyright
Copyright © 2007-2011 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential
and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and
may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private
expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is
unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is
"commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Terms of Use
Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement and Limited Product Warranty ("EULA") delivered with this software
product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed
license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software
product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for
licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable
license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be
considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product
descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated
companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE
SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should
verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, SmartMarine, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN,
MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation
or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Preface ...............................................................................................................................12

If You Need Assistance ....................................................................................................13

Getting HELP in SmartPlant ..........................................................................................14

SmartPlant P&ID Help Command (Help Menu) ........................................................15
About Command (Help Menu) ...................................................................................15
Printable Guides Command (Help Menu) ..................................................................15

Introduction ......................................................................................................................16

Introducing SmartPlant Engineering Manager and SmartPlant P&ID ....................17

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview ................................................................19

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Program Group .....................................................20
SmartPlant Engineering Manager User Interface .......................................................21
Menu Bar .......................................................................................................................... 21
Main Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 22
Tree View ......................................................................................................................... 22
List View........................................................................................................................... 23
Site Server Root ..........................................................................................................25
Plant Group Types Root .............................................................................................26
Hierarchy Templates Root ..........................................................................................26
Using Custom Hierarchies ................................................................................................ 27
Plant Structures Root ..................................................................................................28
Plant Groups Node ............................................................................................................ 28
Roles Node ........................................................................................................................ 29
Applications Node ............................................................................................................ 31

Managing Plant Groups in SmartPlant Engineering Manager ...................................32

Plant Groups Node ......................................................................................................32
Create a New Item in a Plant Group ................................................................................. 32
Revise Plant Group Item – Description Property.............................................................. 33
Revise Plant Group Item – Name Property....................................................................... 33
Delete a Plant Group Item................................................................................................. 35

SmartPlant P&ID Overview ...........................................................................................36

SmartPlant P&ID Program Group ..............................................................................36
SmartPlant P&ID User Interface ................................................................................37
Menu Bar .......................................................................................................................... 39
Main Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 39
Design Window / Modeler ................................................................................................ 39

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 3

Table of Contents

Engineering Data Editor ................................................................................................... 40

Properties Window............................................................................................................ 40
Catalog Explorer Window ................................................................................................ 42
Status Bar .......................................................................................................................... 43
Dialog Boxes..................................................................................................................... 44
Ribbons ............................................................................................................................. 45
Tool Tips ........................................................................................................................... 45
SmartPlant P&ID Reference Data ..............................................................................46

Drawing Manager ............................................................................................................47

Drawing Manager User Interface ...............................................................................47
Modifying User Interface (View Menu) .....................................................................47
Filter Command ................................................................................................................ 48
Clear Filter Command....................................................................................................... 49
Include Subnodes Command ............................................................................................ 49
Customize Current View Command ................................................................................. 50
Working with Drawings .............................................................................................51
New Drawing Command .................................................................................................. 51
Copy Command ................................................................................................................ 53
Paste Command ................................................................................................................ 53
Move a Drawing ............................................................................................................... 56
Delete Command .............................................................................................................. 56
Properties Command ......................................................................................................... 57
Opening Drawings ......................................................................................................57
Open Drawing Command ................................................................................................. 58
Open a Drawing from Drawing Manager ......................................................................... 58
Open a Drawing in a Different Site from Drawing Manager............................................ 58
Open a Drawing in a Different Plant, same site from Drawing Manager ......................... 58
Open Drawings from SmartPlant P&ID ........................................................................... 59
Open a Drawing in a Different Site from SmartPlant P&ID ............................................ 59
Open a Drawing in a Different Plant, same site from SmartPlant P&ID .......................... 59

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment ........................................60

Arranging Work Space ...............................................................................................60
Using the Window Menu ............................................................................................60
New Command ................................................................................................................. 61
Cascade Command............................................................................................................ 63
Tile Horizontally Command ............................................................................................. 63
Tile Vertically Command ................................................................................................. 63
Maximizing the Design Window ................................................................................64
Using the View Menu .................................................................................................64
Previous Command ........................................................................................................... 65
Apply Display Set Command ........................................................................................... 65
Clear Display Set Command ............................................................................................. 66
Zoom Area Command....................................................................................................... 66
Zoom In Command ........................................................................................................... 67
Zoom Out Command ........................................................................................................ 67
Fit Command .................................................................................................................... 67
Pan Command ................................................................................................................... 67

4 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Table of Contents

Show Grid Command ....................................................................................................... 67

Snap Grid Command......................................................................................................... 67
Show Inconsistencies ........................................................................................................ 68
Display Command ............................................................................................................ 68
Toolbars Command ........................................................................................................... 68
Properties Command ......................................................................................................... 69
Using the Tools Menu ................................................................................................74
System Editing Command ................................................................................................ 74
Replace Mode Command .................................................................................................. 74
Gapping Lines ................................................................................................................... 76
Compare and Refresh Command ...................................................................................... 77
Update Symbology Command .......................................................................................... 77
SmartSketch Settings Command ....................................................................................... 78
Custom Commands ........................................................................................................... 79
Customize Command ........................................................................................................ 79
Options Command ............................................................................................................ 83

Using the Catalog Explorer .............................................................................................88

File Menu ....................................................................................................................89
Find Command ................................................................................................................. 89
New Command ................................................................................................................. 90
Delete Command .............................................................................................................. 90
Rename Command ............................................................................................................ 90
Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command ................................................................................. 91
Send to Stockpile Command ............................................................................................. 91
Send to Drawing Stockpile Command .............................................................................. 91
Views Menu ................................................................................................................91
Buttons / Navigation Menu .........................................................................................92
Designing Symbol Toolbars .......................................................................................92
Define a User Level Symbol Toolbar ............................................................................... 93
Define a Plant Level Symbol Toolbar............................................................................... 94

Placing Equipment and Equipment Components .........................................................95

Place Equipment .........................................................................................................96
Parametrics........................................................................................................................ 96
Scaling .............................................................................................................................. 96
Placing Multiple Representations ..................................................................................... 97
Steps to Place Multiple Representations ........................................................................... 97
Equipment Reference Data .........................................................................................98
Place Equipment Components ....................................................................................99
Equipment Components Reference Data ..................................................................100

Routing Piping and Signal Lines ..................................................................................101

Line Connectivity .....................................................................................................101
Auto Join...................................................................................................................102
Route a Line ..............................................................................................................102
Modify a Line Using Vertex Handles .......................................................................103
Line Routing Ribbon ................................................................................................103

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 5

Table of Contents

Diagonal Mode (Alt) ....................................................................................................... 103

Insert Segment ................................................................................................................ 104
Break Run ....................................................................................................................... 104
Join Runs......................................................................................................................... 104
Heat Tracing .............................................................................................................105
Pipe Jacket ................................................................................................................106
Piping Reference Data ..............................................................................................106

Placing Piping Components ..........................................................................................107

Place a Piping Component ........................................................................................107
Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ...............................................................................108
Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool................................................ 108
Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool ............................................. 109
Placing two components (valve and reducer) end to end .........................................109
Placing two components (nozzle and piping flange) end to end ..............................110
Break Components....................................................................................................111
Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors ....................................................................112
Types of OPCs ................................................................................................................ 112
Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector ............................................... 112
Orientation of OPCs........................................................................................................ 113
Place an OPC or Utility Connector ................................................................................. 114
Open Continuation Drawing Command ......................................................................... 116
Using Utility Connectors ................................................................................................ 116
Delete Behavior of OPCs ................................................................................................ 118
Piping Component Reference Data ..........................................................................118

Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation.........................................120

Creation of Instrument Loops ...................................................................................120
Placement of Inline Instruments ...............................................................................121
Placement of Offline Instruments .............................................................................122
Add Instruments to a Loop .......................................................................................123
Remove an Instrument from a Loop .........................................................................124
Instrumentation Reference Data ...............................................................................124

Selecting Drawing Items ................................................................................................126

Select Tool Command ..............................................................................................126
Select Tool Ribbon ......................................................................................................... 126
Polygon Fence Locate Command .............................................................................127
Polygon Fence Ribbon .................................................................................................... 127
Selecting Single Items ..............................................................................................128
Select an Item.................................................................................................................. 128
Selecting Multiple Items ...........................................................................................129
Canceling the Selection of Items ..............................................................................131
Selecting Connected Items (Edit Menu) ...................................................................131
Select Connected Items Dialog Box ............................................................................... 131
Create a Select Set from a Line....................................................................................... 133

6 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Table of Contents

Modifying and Moving Placed Items ...........................................................................134

Manipulating Items with Component Handles .........................................................135
Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle ......................................................................... 135
Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle.......................................................................... 136
Scale a Parametric Item .................................................................................................. 136
Scale a Drawing Item ...................................................................................................... 136
Moving Items ............................................................................................................137
Move an Item Using the Move Command ...................................................................... 137
Move an Item With the Select Tool ................................................................................ 138
Move To Drawing Command ......................................................................................... 138
Copying Items ...........................................................................................................140
Copy an Item Using the Copy Command ....................................................................... 141
Copy an Item With the Select Tool................................................................................. 141
Copy Labels .................................................................................................................... 141
Finding and Replacing Drawing Items .....................................................................142
Find and Replace Commands (Edit Menu) ..................................................................... 142
Mirror Command ......................................................................................................144
Mirror Ribbon ................................................................................................................. 144
Rotate Command ......................................................................................................145
Rotate Ribbon ................................................................................................................. 146
Undo Command ........................................................................................................147
Undo Your Last Action................................................................................................... 148
Deleting Items ...........................................................................................................148
Items deleted to the Stockpile ......................................................................................... 148
Items deleted from the Model ......................................................................................... 148
Delete an Item from a Drawing ...................................................................................... 149
Delete from Model .......................................................................................................... 149
Deleting Stockpile Items ................................................................................................. 150
Default Delete Key Behavior .......................................................................................... 150

Working with Database Properties ..............................................................................151

Properties Window Toolbar ......................................................................................153
Data Types of Properties ..........................................................................................154
Hyperlink Documents or URLs ................................................................................155

Labeling ..........................................................................................................................156
Placing Labels ...........................................................................................................156
Using the Types of Labels ........................................................................................157
Title Block ...................................................................................................................... 157
Flow Arrow ..................................................................................................................... 158
Component ...................................................................................................................... 158
Break ............................................................................................................................... 159
Label Alignment .......................................................................................................160
Alignment Choices.......................................................................................................... 160

Using Filters ....................................................................................................................161

Select Filter Dialog Box ...........................................................................................161

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 7

Table of Contents

Managing Filters .......................................................................................................162

Simple Filters .................................................................................................................. 163
Compound Filters ........................................................................................................... 165

Working With Assemblies .............................................................................................167

Create an Assembly ..................................................................................................168
Place an Assembly ....................................................................................................169
Assembly Reference Data.........................................................................................170

Working with Typicals ..................................................................................................171

Drawing Views .........................................................................................................172
Typical Commands (Edit Menu) ..............................................................................173
Move to Typical Command ............................................................................................ 174
Move to Primary Command............................................................................................ 174
Create Typical Command ............................................................................................... 174
Creating a Typical.....................................................................................................174
Connecting Typicals to objects in the Primary View ...............................................176

Adding Design Elements................................................................................................179

Using Annotations ....................................................................................................179
Place an Annotation ........................................................................................................ 180
Select Associated Item Command ............................................................................180
Packages and Systems ..............................................................................................181
Place a Package ............................................................................................................... 181
Area Breaks ..............................................................................................................182
Place an Area Break ........................................................................................................ 182
Hydraulic Circuits .....................................................................................................183
Associate Hydraulic Circuits with an Item ..................................................................... 183
Select Hydraulic Circuits Dialog Box............................................................................. 184
Revision Clouds ........................................................................................................185
Place a Revision Cloud ................................................................................................... 185
Design Reference Data .............................................................................................185

Auxiliary Graphics.........................................................................................................186
Drawing and Editing in Auxiliary Graphics Mode...................................................186
Inserting Auxiliary Graphics........................................................................................... 187
Closing Auxiliary Graphics ............................................................................................ 187
Editing Auxiliary Graphics ............................................................................................. 187
Toolbars ....................................................................................................................187
Draw Toolbar .................................................................................................................. 187
Change Toolbar............................................................................................................... 188
Relationship Toolbar....................................................................................................... 188
Customizing Toolbars ..................................................................................................... 188
SmartSketch Settings Command ..............................................................................189
Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) .................................................. 189
Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box) ............................................................. 190

8 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Table of Contents

Linking and Embedding Objects ..................................................................................191

Linking or Embedding ..............................................................................................191
Embedding by Cutting or Copying, and Pasting ......................................................192
Linking or Embedding an Object .............................................................................193
Editing a Linked or Embedded Object .....................................................................193

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor .................................................................194

Types of EDE ...........................................................................................................194
EDE in the Design Window ............................................................................................ 194
Default EDE .................................................................................................................... 195
The EDE Toolbar ......................................................................................................195
Query Results Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 196
Customize the EDE...................................................................................................198
Edit View Dialog Box..................................................................................................... 198
Default Table Layouts..................................................................................................... 199
Advanced View Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................... 199
Save View Command ..................................................................................................... 203
AutoFilter Command ...................................................................................................... 204
Freeze Panes Command .................................................................................................. 204
Display Settings Command............................................................................................. 204
Plant Editing (Editing Properties in the EDE) ..........................................................204
Active and Non-Active Drawings ................................................................................... 205
Working with the Stockpile in the EDE ...................................................................206
Deleting Symbols ............................................................................................................ 207
Off Page Connector Mates .............................................................................................. 207
Moving and Placing Stockpile Items ........................................................................208
Moving Between Stockpiles ........................................................................................... 208

System Editing................................................................................................................210
System Editing Command ........................................................................................211
The Scope of System Editing ...................................................................................211
Plant Editing of Objects in an Active Drawing............................................................... 211
Plant Editing of Objects in Non-Active Drawings.......................................................... 212
System Editing and Consistency Checking ..............................................................212
Understanding System Editing and OPCs ................................................................213
System Editing and Changing Property Values Across OPCs .................................215

Consistency Checking ....................................................................................................216

Consistency Checking and Break Labels .................................................................216
Consistency Check Command ..................................................................................216
Consistency Check Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 217
Inconsistencies Tab ......................................................................................................... 218
Consistency Criteria Tab................................................................................................. 219

Calling Item Tag Validation .........................................................................................222

Equipment .................................................................................................................223

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 9

Table of Contents

Nozzles .....................................................................................................................223
Piping ........................................................................................................................224
Off-Page Connectors ................................................................................................225
Instrument Loops ......................................................................................................225

Using Piping Specification Access ................................................................................226

PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec .............................................................................226
Performing Service Limits Validation ......................................................................227
Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication Category Look Up ..........................227
Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using PipeSpec ..............................228
Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component Using PipeSpec ......................229

Using Insulation Specifications .....................................................................................231

Insulation Specification Access ................................................................................231
Assign an Insulation Specification.................................................................................. 232

Generating Reports ........................................................................................................233

The Reports Menu ....................................................................................................234
Generating a report from the Reports menu.................................................................... 234
Generate a report for an active drawing .......................................................................... 236
Reporting from the EDE ...........................................................................................237
Generating a report from the EDE .................................................................................. 237
Generate a report for all equipment in the plant ............................................................. 238

Printing Drawings ..........................................................................................................239

Printing the Active Drawing .....................................................................................239
Print Command ............................................................................................................... 239
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 240
Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 242
Printing Multiple Drawings ......................................................................................243
Print Command ............................................................................................................... 243
Print Dialog Box ............................................................................................................. 243

Importing Drawing Data ...............................................................................................246

Import Data File Command ......................................................................................246
Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile ....................................................246
Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into the Stockpile................. 246
Import Aspen Zyqad Stream Data ............................................................................247
Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet ..............................................................248

Using Drawing Revisions...............................................................................................250

New Revision Command ..........................................................................................250
New Revision Dialog Box ........................................................................................250
Revision History Command .....................................................................................251
Revision History Dialog Box....................................................................................251

10 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Table of Contents

Using Drawing Versions ................................................................................................253

Creating a New Version of a Drawing .....................................................................253
Create a Version of a Drawing........................................................................................ 253
Create Versions of All Drawings .................................................................................... 255
Recovering Drawings ...............................................................................................256
Multiple Representations ................................................................................................ 256
Off Page Connectors (OPCs) .......................................................................................... 257
Pipe and Signal Lines...................................................................................................... 257
Plant Group Joins ............................................................................................................ 257
Plant Item Groups ........................................................................................................... 257
Plant Item Group Joins.................................................................................................... 258
Miscellaneous ................................................................................................................. 258
Recover a Version of a Drawing ..................................................................................... 259
Recover a Version of a Deleted Drawing ....................................................................... 261

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager ...................................................263

Compare Versions of Drawings in Same Database ..................................................264
Compare Versions of Drawings in Separate Databases ...........................................265
Version History Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 265
Compare Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 266
Compare Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 270
Compare With Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 272

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID ........................273

Compare With Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 273
Compare and Refresh Dialog Box .................................................................................. 273
Compare Options Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 277
Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions........................................................................ 278
Compare and Refresh Examples ..................................................................................... 279

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 11

Preface

Preface
This document is a guide for the SmartPlant P&ID User Course; SmartPlant P&ID -
Creating a P&ID. The various SmartPlant P&ID User Guides and the online Help
delivered as part of the software can be used as a supplement to this course guide.

12 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 If You Need Assistance

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph Online
Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about
Intergraph‘s products, services, and direction. Our web address is:

http://www.intergraph.com/

Intergraph Support
You may log a service request via the web at:

https://crmweb.intergraph.com

In the United States, call Intergraph‘s standard support number at 1-800-766-7701

from 7:30 AM to 5:30 PM CST, Monday through Friday, except holidays.

If you are outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The
most up-to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web at:

http://www.intergraph.com/worldwide.aspx

Please have the following information available when you call or log a Service
Request (SR):

Your Name and Telephone Number

The Product‘s name

A detailed description of the Problem, Error Messages, Screenshots, and Log

Files.
The full version of the product including the Service Pack number.
Note: You can use About SmartPlant P&ID on the Help menu to see your
software version and license information.

Training Registration (U.S. Only):

1-800-766-7701

http://www.intergraph.com/training/

Mailing Address:
300 Intergraph Way
Madison, Alabama 35758
U.S.A.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 13

Getting HELP in SmartPlant

Getting HELP in SmartPlant

The software's user assistance supplies command information as you perform tasks.
You can access different kinds of information any time you are running the software.
This information could include reference topics, narrative descriptions, or
instructional material.

In addition, the software provides several learning tools that you can activate from the
online Help menu.

The software offers the following important user-assistance features:

Online Help
• Complete command descriptions give you more information when you
click Help or press Shift + F1. With Shift + F1, the pointer changes to a
northwest arrow with a question mark. You can then get context-sensitive Help
for any command by clicking the toolbar button or by clicking the menu
command at the top of the window.

• A structured table of contents, an index, and full-text search capabilities

provide easy access to Help topics. Press F1 any time you need online
Help during a design session. When a command is active, the Help topic
for that command appears. If no command is active, then the table of
contents for the Help topics appears.

You can also access the table of contents by clicking SmartPlant P&ID Help
on the Help menu.

User Interface Features

• ToolTips helps you find command names. When you pause the pointer on
the command button on the toolbar, a yellow label displays the command's
name.

• Brief command descriptions show you the basic function of a command.

When you point the pointer at the command button on the toolbar, the
description appears in the Status Bar at the bottom of the window. Also,
messages that explain your actions for each step of the command appear in
the Status Bar.

14 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Getting HELP in SmartPlant

SmartPlant P&ID Help Command (Help Menu)

Displays the table of contents for the SmartPlant P&ID Help topics, which include
step-by-step instructions for using the software, reference information, examples of
features, and technical support information. It also provides access to the Help index
and full-text search.

About Command (Help Menu)

Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version number
and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.

Printable Guides Command (Help Menu)

Opens a page in your Internet browser that includes the links to the User's Guides in
portable document format. Click on a link and the guide is opened in the appropriate
application, from which you can print it. The User's Guides contain the same
information as the online Help.

Upon installing SmartPlant Engineering Manager or P&ID, the printable guides (.pdf)
may also be found on your disk at ~ \Program Files\SmartPlant\Engineering
Manager\Program\resdlls\0009 or ~\Program Files\SmartPlant\P&ID
Workstation\Program\resdlls\0009.

List of Printable Guides

SmartPlant Engineering Managers User‘s Guide SmartPlant P&ID User‘s Guide
SmartPlant Catalog Manager Users‘s Guide SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager User‘s
Guide
SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager Users‘s SmartPlant P&ID Options Manager User‘s Guide
Guide
SmartPlant Data Dictionary Template SmartPlant P&ID Rule Manager User‘s Guide
Comparison Utility Guide
SmartPlant Filter Manager Users‘s Guide SmartPlant P&ID Insulation Specification
Manager User‘s Guide
SmartPlant Format Manager User‘s Guide SmartPlant P&ID to PDS Piping Data Transfer
Configuration and Reference Guide
SmartPlant Line Style Editor Users‘s Guide SmartPlant P&ID Utilities Guide
SmartPlant Reference Data Synchronization SmartPlant P&ID Duplicate Item Tag Report
Manager Guide Utility User‘s Guide
SmartPlant Engineering Manager Upgrade Utility SmartPlant P&ID Installation & Upgrade Guide
User‘s Guide
SmartPlant Projects Configuration and Reference SmartPlant Electrical Installation and Upgrade
Guide Guide
SmartPlant Workshare Configuration and
Reference Guide
SmartPlant Symbol Libraries Reference Guide

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 15

Introduction

Introduction
The Intergraph® SmartPlant® family of process industry solutions is an open line of
discipline-specific software tools that provide an integrated solution for the entire
plant life cycle. Knowledge-based, intuitive, easy-to-use, accessible, flexible, and
data-driven, SmartPlant supports global workflows. The software enables users to
create logical and physical definitions of the plant model and enables access to plant
data from conceptual design to decommissioning.

SmartPlant is the fulfillment of the Intergraph vision to speed and improve the
creation of information and to provide this data to multiple users at any moment in
the appropriate form. Workflows are compressed, reducing production time, lowering
costs, enhancing global execution, and extending the life and usability of plant
information.

The successor to the Intergraph Plant Design System (PDS™), SmartPlant includes
expanded functionality for front-end engineering and design (FEED), construction,
operation, and maintenance phases.

16 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Introducing SmartPlant Engineering Manager and SmartPlant P&ID

Introducing SmartPlant Engineering Manager

and SmartPlant P&ID
SmartPlant Engineering Manager provides all the tools you need to effectively set up
and manage your SmartPlant P&ID and SmartPlant Electrical work. SmartPlant
Engineering Manager takes advantage of a client/server design that facilitates
administrative tasks and enhances performance. Because it is built on few Microsoft
dependencies and is not web-based, SmartPlant Engineering Manager requires no
web server. The intuitive user interface design, with its streamlined layout, allows
you to easily manage user access and to share plant data.

SmartPlant P&ID creates intelligent Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs)

by populating the database with relevant plant data and provides valuable information
throughout the plant life cycle. SmartPlant P&ID is a data-centric, rule-based solution
for the P&ID life cycle, and it helps users improve design quality, data consistency,
and standards compliance.

SmartPlant Engineering Manager and SmartPlant P&ID have their own application
window. From each application window, you can access all the features using the
application‘s graphical user interface.

SmartPlant P&ID data is stored in the plant database and adheres to plant standards.
SmartPlant P&ID uses a Relational Database Management System (RDBMS) to
store, organize and manipulate the data in the database. The RDBMS controls access
to a database through users. Database users are recognized by their usernames and
passwords and have ownership of and access privileges to the data in the database.

The graphical representation of the P&ID is a view or a report of the data. The data
import and export facilities of SmartPlant P&ID allow users to populate the system
with relevant plant data, such as process data from process simulation databases
based on Aspen Basic Engineering (Zyqad) from AspenTech or equipment and line
lists.

The rule-based and automation capabilities of SmartPlant P&ID differentiate it from

other P&ID systems. SmartPlant P&ID features a comprehensive, user-definable rule-
based system that assists the engineer during the design phase of the plant and
subsequent life cycle phases. Data is entered directly into the database, rules are
executed, and feedback is immediate. The design rule-base confirms data consistency
and compliance with plant and engineering standards, allowing faster, more efficient
design with less iteration.

SmartPlant P&ID incorporates Microsoft technologies, such as OLE automation, to

provide integration with existing data and other systems. Running on Microsoft
Windows Operating Systems, SmartPlant P&ID does not require a traditional CAD
engine for P&ID creation. The open architecture of SmartPlant P&ID permits

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 17

Introducing SmartPlant Engineering Manager and SmartPlant P&ID

integration with other systems, such as Intergraph PDS and Aspen Basic Engineering
(Zyqad), which allow users to share data with third-party software.

The Interactive Graphic commands in the categories of equipment, piping,

instrumentation, design, and assemblies are supplied by the SmartPlant P&ID
software and support a wide range of schematic and 2D physical applications.

The reference database (RDB) includes symbols, report files, and templates, which
support actions performed during the design creation task. The RDB supports the
international engineering standards of the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), Deutsches Institut für Normung (DIN), Process Industry Practices (PIP), ISO
Plus (International Organization for Standardization), and Kraftwerk-Kennzeichen
System (KKS).

With SmartPlant P&ID, you can easily create a detailed plant model. You can place
components such as equipment, piping, and instrumentation from the Catalog
Explorer or the Stockpile into graphical representations of your plant model in the
drawing.

A key feature of SmartPlant P&ID is using catalogs to create instances of components

within the plant model. Within this environment, you can drag and drop items from
the catalog into appropriate model views.

In the Properties window, you can add values for various properties of each item
after you place it in your drawing. You can also annotate your drawing with labels as
you design the P&ID.

If you repeatedly place particular groups of items, you can save the group of items as
an assembly. Assemblies appear as symbols in the Catalog Explorer list view so
that you can place them exactly as you place other symbols in your drawing.

As you work on your drawing, you can monitor any inconsistencies in your design by
reviewing the inconsistency indicators. These indicators appear in your drawing as
soon as an inconsistency occurs in the design. You can resolve inconsistencies using
hints from the Consistency Check dialog box.

At any time during the P&ID creation workflow, you can generate reports to help you
keep track of information in the P&ID. After you finish the P&ID, you can generate a
Material Take Off (MTO) for the components in the drawing, and you can also print
the drawing.

18 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Supporting SmartPlant P&ID and SmartPlant Electrical, SmartPlant Engineering
Manager manages the plant structures while the applications themselves are
responsible for manipulating the actual data (including creating, deleting, modifying,
and launching). SmartPlant Engineering Manager allows you to view not only the
data related to the whole site but also data related to individual plants. You can create
and maintain SmartPlant Engineering sites and plant structures, in addition to adding
plant group types, modifying plant attributes, creating and modifying hierarchies, and
associating SmartPlant applications.

Site

Plant Plant

P&ID P&ID Electrical

Application Application Application

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 19

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Program Group

The SmartPlant Engineering Manager Program group provides several utilities for
managing your plant data. For more information on these topics, please attend
SmartPlant P&ID Setup and Customization Training.

SmartPlant Engineering Manager allows you to create the SmartPlant site

and plants. You can create plant structures, plant groups, hierarchy templates, as well
as define the access to plant data on many levels.

Catalog Manager allows you to create and modify symbols and labels.

Data Dictionary Manager allows you to add custom properties to SmartPlant

database tables, define external programs, view relationships, and create and modify
select lists.

Data Dictionary Template Comparison Utility allows you to compare two

data dictionary templates at a time.

Filter Manager allows you to create and modify filters to discriminate on

database data. Filters are used for displaying data in symbology, gapping, graphical
views, reports, rules, and so forth.

Format Manager defines available formats for units of measure properties.

Reference Data Synchronization Manager allows you to synchronize

reference data (including data dictionaries, rules, options, and symbols) between
plants.

Refresh Site Roles Utility allows you to automatically refresh the roles in a
site on a scheduled basis.

Upgrade Utility guides you through upgrading your SmartPlant Engineering

data.

20 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

SmartPlant Engineering Manager User Interface

The SmartPlant Engineering Manager User Interface consists of several parts; the
Menu Bar, the Main Toolbar, the Tree View, and the List View. The Menu Bar
contains pull-down command menus. The Main Toolbar displays command buttons.
The Tree View on the left displays the nodes (Site Server, Plant Structures, Hierarchy
Templates and Plant Group Types) in a tree format. The List View on the right
displays property data for the nodes in the selected branch in the tree.

Note:

The commands in SmartPlant Engineering Manager are node-specific,

meaning that the availability of a command depends on which node in the
Tree View or item in the List View you select.

SmartPlant Engineering
Manager Window
Menu Bar

Main Toolbar

List View

Tree View

Menu Bar
The Menu Bar contains menus. Each menu contains its own set of pull-down
commands. The commands are your main source of interaction with the SmartPlant
Engineering Manager application.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 21

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Menus

Menu Bar

Pull-Down Commands

Separator Line

Note:

During certain operations, the system dims some of the commands. For
example, if a particular command is not applicable at a certain selection that
command is disabled until it is applicable. This feature has been applied to
commands to clarify the user interface.

Main Toolbar
The Main Toolbar displays command buttons for some of the same pull-down
commands in the menus. The command buttons provide a quick and visual way to
execute commands in SmartPlant Engineering Manager without searching through
the menus.

Tree View
The Tree view displays plant structures, hierarchy templates and plant group types. At
the base of the tree is the Site Server root. The Site Server root is created when the
Create Site Schema Wizard completes.

22 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

List View
The List view displays property data for the children of the selected node in the tree.
You can sort the List view by clicking a column heading. You can use the Tools >
Show Fields command to control which properties appear in the List view and the
order in which they appear.

Show Fields Command

The Tools > Show Fields command allows you to specify which properties display in
the List view and the order in which they appear. The List view columns are the
properties of the items in the Tree view.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 23

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Plant hierarchy - Lists the items available for display in the List view. Select an
item from this list to display its properties in the Properties list.

Properties - Lists all available properties for the selected item. Properties that that are
checked will display in the List view in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

Move Up - Moves the selected property up in the list. The higher a property is in the
list, the farther to the left the property appears in the List view.

Move Down - Moves the selected property down in the list. The lower a property is
in the list, the farther to the right the property appears in the List view.

Notes:

To enable the Show Fields command, select the Site Server node or a Plant
node.

Show Fields settings for the site server are stored in the SiteShowFields.cfg
file in the C:\Documents and Settings\user profile folder. This file contains all
Show Fields settings except for the plant hierarchy information, which is
stored in the plant schema.

24 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Site Server Root

The Site Server node is the root directory for each site when opened in SmartPlant
Engineering Manager. A site is a logical unit of data that is normally used to model a
collection of physical plants. Every plant within a site has a unique identity.

In SmartPlant Engineering Manager, you access a site by opening the

smartplantv4.ini file, which contains the database type, connection alias, and the
schema information for the site and the site data dictionary. The site schema basically
keeps track of the plants in the site. You can place this .ini file in any location on any
workstation and share it out to other users. Therefore, a site server is simply any
workstation where the SmartPlantV4.ini file is stored.

The three main root nodes are listed under the Site Server root:
1. Plant Structures
2. Hierarchy Templates
3. Plant Group Types

For each plant structure, the Site Server node contains a Plant Structure node that
contains its related Plant Groups, Roles, and Applications. The Hierarchy
Templates and Plant Group Types nodes are available for use by members of the
Site Administrators user access group.

Important

While you can connect to only one site at a time, you can have more than one
site on any given computer.

The Site Server Options dialog box displays when you run SmartPlant Engineering
Manager for the first time. This dialog box will display during future sessions only
when SmartPlant Engineering Manager cannot find an active site server or the site
connection information in the SmartPlantV4.ini is invalid.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 25

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Create a new site - Starts the New Site Server wizard, which steps you through
creating the site server.

Connect to an existing site - Allows you to browse to the location of an existing

SmartPlantV4.ini file.

Restore site from backup - Starts the Restore Site Server wizard.

Note:

Before you can create a site server, you must create a database and the
database must be started. Check the computer‘s Services to verify that the
database is running.

Plant Group Types Root

The Plant Group Types Root displays the building blocks used to create plant
breakdown structures (hierarchies). Eight plant group types are delivered by default.
You can also create custom plant group types.

Hierarchy Templates Root

The Hierarchy Templates Root displays the various hierarchy templates that can be
used to generate the structure of a plant. A hierarchy is made up of a set of two or
more plant group types that are arranged in a tree structure.

26 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Important

Drawings are not allowed in the top-most root item in a hierarchy. Therefore,
Allow P&ID Drawings is not available at the root item level in a hierarchy.

If you use a hierarchy in which Allow P&ID Drawings is not turned on for at
least one level, the plant cannot be used in SmartPlant P&ID, but can be used
in SmartPlant Electrical.

The plant structure hierarchy does not reference the hierarchy template after
the plant structure is created. SmartPlant Engineering Manager writes a copy
of the hierarchy template to the plant database when the new plant is created.
This reduces the dependency on the site for the hierarchy definition and
allows you to modify the hierarchy template independent of whether any plant
structures used it during their creation.

You cannot modify a plant structure hierarchy after the plant structure has
been created.

Using Custom Hierarchies

SmartPlant Enterprise (integration) supports custom hierarchies, as long as they
contain a minimum of three levels. By default, the delivered SPEMdatamap.xml file
is compatible with the standard SmartPlant Engineering Manager Plant > Area >
Unit hierarchy.

Notes:

After registering with SmartPlant Enterprise, SmartPlant Engineering

Manager cannot retrieve the plant breakdown structures (PBS) document if
the plant and SmartPlant hierarchies are not compatible. To be compatible
with the SmartPlant hierarchy, your plant hierarchy can contain less than or
equal to, but not more than the number of levels in the SmartPlant hierarchy.

SmartPlant Engineering Manager retrieves only the hierarchy levels it needs

from the SmartPlant hierarchy. For example, if your plant hierarchy contains 4

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 27

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

levels and the SmartPlant hierarchy contains 8 levels, only the top 4 levels of
the SmartPlant hierarchy are retrieved.

Hierarchy item names at the same level do not have to match. Hierarchies are
mapped by depth (level), not by name.

Plant Structures Root

The Plant Structures Root contains all plants created in the site. Each plant structure
represents the physical hierarchy (plant breakdown structure) of your plant. A
hierarchy is used as a template to create a plant structure, defining the available plant
groups for that particular plant. The hierarchy is essentially a set of rules that the plant
structure must follow. Under each plant structure are its related Plant Groups, Roles,
and Applications.

Plant Groups - Displays the plant breakdown structure (physical hierarchy) of the
plant.

Roles - Displays the user access roles defined for the plant.

Applications - Displays the applications associated with the plant.

Plant Groups Node

The Plant Groups node displays the actual physical components of the plant
structure itself. This node shows each hierarchy item created in the plant structure in
the Tree view and displays its attributes in the List view.

28 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Roles Node
SmartPlant Engineering Manager uses roles to define and maintain user privileges
and rights at the plant structure level. The Roles node displays the roles defined for
the plant structure.

Note:
Roles may be tied directly to a Windows user group. The individual users are
added to the Windows user group, and then that group is added as a role in
SmartPlant Engineering Manager. For more information on this topic, please
attend SmartPlant P&ID Setup and Customization Training.

User Access Rights

Users can have access privileges (rights) that vary from one plant to another in the
same site. These rights are defined by categories. Each application, SmartPlant
Engineering Manager and SmartPlant P&ID, have their own categories and rights.
The SmartPlant Engineering Manager rights pertain to plant structure and format
access in general, and the SmartPlant P&ID rights pertain to specific application
access.

The Rights TAB on the Role Properties dialog details the categories and rights. The
categories and rights are exposed through SmartPlant Engineering Manager for
controlling user access privileges on a per-plant basis for each application listed in the
Application pull-down menu. If the Categories have radio button options, this
indicates that the rights contained within are mutually exclusive; you can choose only
one right in that category to apply to the role. In the other categories, you can choose
multiple rights, as denoted by check boxes.

Mutually-Exclusive Rights:
None - The user is not allowed to execute the application or utility for this
plant structure.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 29

SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Read-Only - The user can execute the application or utility for this plant
structure to view the data held within it.

Modify … - The user can execute the application or utility for this plant
structure to view the data held within it and to modify any custom settings.

Full Control - The user can execute the application or utility for this plant
structure and perform all commands and modifications.

Note:

To view the user access rights, right click on the Role and select Properties.
The Role Properties dialog will display. Select the Rights TAB. On the
Application pull-down, select the specific SmartPlant application.

Application
pull-down menu

Radio Button

Check Box

30 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant Engineering Manager Overview

Applications Node
The Applications node displays the engineering applications that are currently
associated with your plant structure. Before you can use SmartPlant P&ID with your
data, you must associate that application with the plant structure. For more
information on this topic, please attend SmartPlant P&ID Setup and Customization
Training.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 31

Managing Plant Groups in SmartPlant Engineering Manager

Managing Plant Groups in SmartPlant

Engineering Manager
Plant Groups Node
The Plant Groups node displays the actual physical components of the plant
structure itself. This node shows each item created in the plant structure and displays
its attributes in the List view.

Example: During the creation of the plant structure for the class, we utilized
Hierarchy Template 7, which has a definition of Plant-Area-Unit. When we create a
new Plant Group within this plant structure, we are prompted to create a new Area
and then a new Unit. Once a plant group has been created, the List view will display
the properties values.

Create a New Item in a Plant Group

1. Select the Plant Groups node from the tree view.

2. Right-click the Plant Groups node, and select the New command or select File >
New. The actual command name changes based on the hierarchy defined for your
plant.

3. Provide the information requested on the New dialog box.

4. Select OK.

Notes:

An asterisk (*) at the end of an item name indicates a value is required for that
item.

The name length is limited to 240 characters. A folder with this name cannot
already exist in the plant structure folder.

The length of the description is limited to 240 characters.

The unit code is used as an alpha-numeric identification field in all tags in all
drawings created in the unit. The length of the unit code is limited to 40
characters. This limit is 3 characters if you plan to use the Piping Data
Transfer to PDS 3D process. This code can be changed after the new unit is
created.

32 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Managing Plant Groups in SmartPlant Engineering Manager

The path displays the location where files in this plant group are stored. The
software automatically appends the value in the Name box to this path and
creates a folder using this name in your plant storage location. This field is
limited to 255 characters.

You can use a space character in the unit name but not any of the following
characters: ~ ! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) - + = < > . , ? / \ | [ ] { } ' " : ;

If a plant group, in the tree view, has no drawings or plant items that belong to
it, you can delete that item in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

The Path field cannot contain any spaces if you plan to use the Piping Data
Transfer to PDS 3D process.

Revise Plant Group Item – Description Property

You can display or edit the properties for the selected plant group item in the plant by
selecting the item in the Tree view, then right-clicking and selecting Properties. The
title of this dialog box and the fields displayed change based on the hierarchy defined
for your plant and the level at which you are viewing the properties.

1. Select the Plant Group Item under the Plant Group node from the tree view.

2. Right-click the item selected and select the Properties command or select Edit >
Properties.

3. Type or change the value for the Description property. Notice the other
properties may be read only and thus grayed out.

4. Select OK.

Revise Plant Group Item – Name Property

1. Select the Plant Group Item under the Plant Group node from the tree view.

2. Right-click the item selected and select the Properties command or select Edit >
Properties.

3. Type or change the value for the Name property. Notice the other properties may
be read only and thus grayed out.

4. Select OK.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 33

Managing Plant Groups in SmartPlant Engineering Manager

Notes:

After a rename of plant group in SmartPlant Engineering Manager, all P&ID

users are locked from the drawings either in Drawing Manager or
SmartPlant P&ID. Changes to plant groups will be seen the next time
Drawing Manager is opened.

Only users with permissions of Full Control in Options Manager will be able
to unlock drawings in SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager with the Unlock
Plant After Group Rename command on the shortcut menu.

P&IDs will have to be updated via Global Validation command in Drawing

Manager to update Item Tags, including any labels which utilize the Item Tag
property. After running Global Validation the drawing will be out-of-date
for Model Items, and the requirement is to run Update Drawings after
Global Validation has been run.

Utilize Update Drawings to update any existing labels, which do not include
the Item Tag property that currently utilizes the Name property. NOTE:
Requires opening the symbol(s) in Catalog Manager to force the drawing
Out-of-Date.

34 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Managing Plant Groups in SmartPlant Engineering Manager

OR

Utilize the Update Labels (UpdateLabelsCmd.dll) to update any existing

labels that currently utilizes the Name property.

Delete a Plant Group Item

1. In the Tree view, select the plant group you want to delete.

2. Right-click and select the Delete command or select Edit > Delete or select
from the toolbar.

Important

To delete a plant group that resides in a plant, you must remove all drawings
from the plant group before it can be deleted. You cannot delete a plant group
that contains any drawings.

If you still cannot delete the plant group after deleting the drawings in the
plant group, check the plant stockpile for items still related to the plant group.
These items must also be deleted or their association with the plant group
removed using SmartPlant P&ID before you can delete the plant group.

Deleting a plant group cannot be undone. If you have backed up your plant
structure, you can use the Restore command to retrieve the backed up version
of the plant structure.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 35

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central, unified data structure that
represents the plant model. A view is a visual presentation of the data in the plant
model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. The plant model is the computer
representation of the conceptual design, including all plant components and their
relationships. By manipulating model views, you can organize the information within
the plant model to better understand and maintain the data.

SmartPlant P&ID Program Group

SmartPlant P&ID has several programs and utilities for visualizing and managing
your plant data.

SmartPlant P&ID provides the design environment for the P&ID.

Drawing Manager allows you to create and delete P&IDs and drawing
versions, and print multiple drawings.

Insulation Specification Manager allows you to create and modify lookup

tables for insulation specifications and thicknesses.

Options Manager defines plant-wide graphic standards for symbology,

gapping, heat tracing, and formats. Options Manager also defines program settings
and paths to the reference data.

Programming Help provides comprehensive information for customizing the

software by using the Automation layer of the SmartPlant P&ID application. You
should be familiar with SmartPlant P&ID interactively and understand the basic
concepts of programming before using Automation

Rule Manager defines rules for placement and the copying of properties on
symbol placement.

36 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant P&ID Overview

SmartPlant P&ID User Interface

The SmartPlant P&ID User Interface consists of several parts; the Menu Bar, the
Main Toolbar, the Design Window or Modeler, the default Engineering Data
Editor (EDE), the Properties Window, and the Catalog Explorer. Using the
specific parts of the SmartPlant P&ID User Interface, you can add, view and edit
information for both the active and non-active drawings representing the plant
model.

Note:

The Active drawing(s) refers to the drawing(s) currently open and visible in
the Design Window. Non-active drawings refer to all other drawings; every
drawing except the one currently active.

The Menu Bar contains menus with pull-down commands. The Main Toolbar
displays command buttons. The Design Window consists of the Drawing View
Window and the Engineering Data Editor Window which is opened using the
Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Command. Both the Drawing View
and the Engineering Data Editors provide a way for you to view information in the
database in two different ways; a graphical representation and a tabular format,
respectively. The Engineering Data Editors and the Properties Window provide a
way for you to edit data for the drawings or plant model in the database. The Catalog
Explorer displays all available catalog items for you to use in the drawings and plant
model.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 37

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

SmartPlant P&ID
Window Main
Menu Bar Properties Window Catalog Explorer
Toolbar

Drawing View
Window

Design Window / Modeler

Default Engineering Data Editor (EDE)

Active Drawing

Drawing
View
Window

Drawing Border

38 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant P&ID Overview

Menu Bar
The Menu Bar contains menus. Each menu contains its own set of pull-down
commands. The commands are your main source of interaction with the SmartPlant
P&ID application.

Main Toolbar
The Main Toolbar displays command buttons for some of the same pull-down
commands in the menus. The command buttons provide a quick and visual way to
execute commands in SmartPlant P&ID without searching through the menus.

Design Window / Modeler

The Design Window, or Modeler, consists of the Drawing View and the
Engineering Data Editor. Each of these views provides a way for you to enter
information for the active drawing into the database. The two views also provide a
way for you to view information in the database in different ways.

In the Drawing View, you can see the traditional diagram of a plant containing
equipment, instrumentation, and piping in a graphical representation. You can create
your drawing in the Drawing View using the vertical and horizontal scroll bars, and
use the Zoom and Pan Commands to change the center point for the Drawing view.
The title bar identifies the drawing name.
The Engineering Data Editor allows you to see the same information in a tabular
format, and it can also display items in the stockpiles (plant and drawing) and the
other drawings (non-active drawings). The title bar identifies the drawing name.

EDE Window
opened in
Design
Window

Drawing
View Window

Design
Window

Default EDE
Window

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 39

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

Engineering Data Editor

The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display and
manage data for all objects in the plant and the stockpiles. The information displayed
is based on query results from the database. You can view the same information as in
the Drawing View or items in the plant and drawing stockpiles by specifying filters
and layouts to define the table information. Then, you can input or edit the property
values. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table, much
like the Properties Window.

Note:
The EDE Scope buttons allow you to view items in the Active Drawing,
Active Drawing Stockpile, Stockpile (Plant), or Other Drawings (non-active
drawings).

Default
Engineering Data Editor
EDE Scope Asking Count of
(EDE) Window Item Type List
Filter Items

Property values of Objects in Database based

on Item Type and EDE Scope selected

Properties Window
When you select an item in a plant model, you can enter, view, and modify the
properties associated with that item in the Properties window. Your system
administrator can create custom properties and their default values for each property
in the Data Dictionary Manager.

40 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant P&ID Overview

Selected Items list

Property Window Commands

Category

Properties
Vertical Scroll Bar

Property Values

The Properties Window is automatically displayed on the right side of the main
window when you select View > Toolbars > Properties, select the Properties
Button from the Main Toolbar, or select View > Display > Properties.

The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common
properties of the current selection in the active Design window. The active items
always determine the content of the Properties window. You can only have one
Properties window open. If only one component is selected, or all components are of
the same type, all the properties of that type of component appear. If your select set
contains components of different types, then only the common properties appear. If
the selected items have different values for their common properties, the value box is
blank.

You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. You can display
and edit relationships that involve components, component types, or assemblies.

At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list, which itemizes all of
the selected objects individually and as a select set. You can display item properties
by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list, as well as by selecting an
item in the Design window. If more than one item is selected in the Design window,
then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items
in the set.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 41

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

Catalog Explorer Window

Catalog Explorer Window is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic
catalog containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. Conceptually, the
Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a
plant. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections; you can search for
items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections.
Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. You can
browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks
for important categories.

The Catalog Explorer Window is automatically displayed on the right side of the
main window when you select View > Toolbars > Catalog Explorer, select the
Catalog Explorer Button from the Main Toolbar, or select View > Display >
Catalog Explorer.

Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. In
the Tree view, you can view the nodes of the catalog file system and open or close
the nodes by clicking the + or – icons by the selected node to see or hide the contents.
In the List view, you see the contents of the opened node. You also use the List view
to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. You can
create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts to
places throughout the catalog.

Toolbar buttons carry out commands and allow you to customize the tree and list
views to suit your work session. These toolbar buttons are located at the top of the
tree view.

42 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant P&ID Overview

Toolbar Buttons

Nodes Tree View

Expansion Icon

Vertical Scroll Bar

Collapse Icon

Horizontal Scroll Bar

Catalog Items

List View

Status Bar
The Status Bar displays at the bottom of the main window when a drawing is opened
and if ―Show status bar‖ is checked on Tools > Options dialog (General TAB). When
you point at a command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the Status
Bar at the bottom of the window.

The image below displays the Status Bar when you have pointed at the Zoom Area
command button.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 43

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

Also, prompts that explain what to do at each step of the command, and messages
about the operations the software is performing appear in the Status Bar.

The image below displays the Status Bar when you have selected a valve from the
Catalog Explorer to place in the Drawing View.

Dialog Boxes
Dialog Boxes are another type of menu available and represent the most detailed
method of interaction between you and the software application.

The Dialog Box below is from the Edit > Replace command within the SmartPlant
P&ID environment.

44 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 SmartPlant P&ID Overview

List Box Action

Command
Button

Radio Button

Ribbons
Ribbons help you control various settings for the active command and are commonly
found within the SmartPlant P&ID program. You can use the same ribbon for
creating an item or modifying it. For example, if you place a pipe run or select an
existing pipe run to modify it, the same ribbon is active. The options on a ribbon work
like options on dialog boxes. Any options that you set affect the active command.

The Line Routing Ribbon below appears when you select a line element from the
Catalog Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an
existing line in a drawing. You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main
toolbar; it remains there for the current design session unless you move it again.

Tool Tips
Tool Tips help you find toolbar command names. When you point to a command
button on the toolbar, a yellow label displays the command‘s name.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 45

SmartPlant P&ID Overview

SmartPlant P&ID Reference Data

The SmartPlant P&ID product is delivered with a set of Symbols (.sym format),
Rules.rul, ProjectStyles.spp, InsulationSpec.isl, Templates (.pid format), Borders (.igr
format), Report files, ExportLayer.xls, and SmartPlant Enterprise (integration) files
that can serve as a starting point for P&ID creation. This example reference data is
located in the ~\SmartPlant\P&ID Reference Data directory. This data can be fully
customized to meet a project's standards.

For a book of the delivered symbols, reference the printable guide of SmartPlant
Symbol Libraries Reference Guide or the SymbolLibrariesRefGuide.pdf file located
in ~Program Installation
Folder\SmartPlant\P&IDWorkstation\Program\resdlls\0009\
The SmartPlant P&ID Reference Data is delivered in ANSI standard, but other
engineering standards are also available.

46 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

Drawing Manager
Drawing Manager manages the drawing files in SmartPlant P&ID. You do not
modify the designs themselves in Drawing Manager, but you do create, open, delete
drawings and modify drawing properties. Drawing Manager is also the interface for
printing multiple drawings and for upgrading drawings to the current version of
SmartPlant P&ID.

Drawing Manager includes versioning tools for creating, comparing, and recovering
deleted drawing versions. These operations are carried out with commands on the
Revisions menu.

Drawing Manager User Interface

The Drawing Manager User Interface consists of several areas (Menu Bar, the
Main Toolbar, the Tree View, and the List View). The Menu Bar contains menus
with pull-down commands. The Main Toolbar displays command buttons. The Tree
View on the left displays plant groups arranged in nodes. The List View on the right
displays the list of drawings.
Drawing Manager Window Menu Bar Main Toolbar

List View

Tree View

Modifying User Interface (View Menu)

You can control the display of the List view using the View menu. You can add a
filter so that only drawings that match specific criteria are displayed. You can display
all drawings that reside under the selected node in the Tree view, and then customize
what drawing properties are displayed and the order in which they are displayed in
the List view.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 47

Drawing Manager

Note:

You can drag-and-drop drawings from one plant group to another plant group,
providing the P&IDs are in the same plant structure and the Allow P&ID
Drawings option has been enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

Filter Command
The View > Filter command sets options for the display of drawings in the List view.
The Filter dialog box opens when you click View > Filter.

Definition - Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. To add to or modify
the definition list, you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property
in the Edit group.

48 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

Match all - Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass
through the filter.

Match any - (Default) Specifies that items matching any one or more of the
filtering criteria pass through the filter.

Add - Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the
options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.

Delete - Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. This button is
available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.

Edit - Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.

Property - Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Examples of
properties include revision number and name. You define or modify filtering
criteria by selecting a property, an operator, and a value.

Operator - Specifies the relationship between the property and its value. These
relationships include greater than, >; equal to, =; not equal to, <>; and so forth.

Value - Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property list. If
a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box, you must choose
null or type a value, which can be free text. You can type a percent sign, %, as a
wildcard character to find multiple characters, or type a question mark, ?, as a
wildcard character for a single character. Do not use an asterisk, *, in the Value
box.

Note:

View filters in Drawing Manager are strictly established only for the specific
case at hand; you cannot save a filter setting.

Clear Filter Command

The View > Clear Filter command removes a filter from the view and displays all
drawings. This command is available only if you have applied a filter to the view.

Include Subnodes Command

The View > Include Subnodes command displays in the List view all of the
drawings that reside under the selected plant in the Tree view, not only those
drawings that reside directly under the selected node.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 49

Drawing Manager

Note:

If you select a plant in the Tree view and then click View > Include
Subnodes, the entire plant hierarchy is displayed in the List view. This
command provides an easy way of viewing all drawings in the plant without
having to open every Plant Group.

Customize Current View Command

The View > Customize Current View command sets options for the information that
is displayed in the List view of Drawing Manager. The Customize Current View
dialog box opens when you click View > Customize Current View on the menu bar.

Drawing properties - Lists the drawing properties that are available for display in
the List view. Select a property from this list and click Add in order to move it to the
Selected properties list.

Note:

If the Out-of-Date Drawing Status is selected, it will always be the first

column displayed in the List view in Drawing Manager.

Selected properties - List the properties that will display in the List view.

Add - Moves the property into the Selected properties list so that the selected
information is displayed in the List view.

Remove - Moves the selected property back into the Drawing properties list. That
information will no longer display in the List view.

50 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

Move Up - Moves the property you select in the Selected properties list up one
position. Use this button to further customize the way the columns in the List view
are displayed.

Move Down - Moves the property that you select in the Selected Properties list
down one position. Use this button to further customize the way the columns in the
List view are displayed.

Working with Drawings

Drawing Manager enables you to manage your P&ID drawings by allowing you to
create new drawings in your plant structure, open and view drawings, copy and paste,
view and compare versions, and delete drawings.

Note:

You can drag-and-drop drawings from one plant group to another plant group,
providing the P&IDs are in the same plant structure and the Allow P&ID
Drawings option has been enabled in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

New Drawing Command

The File > New Drawing command opens the New Drawing dialog box where you
specify properties to create a new drawing. The drawing is created under the currently
selected plant group node in the Tree view.

Notes:

You must have the appropriate permissions, specified in SmartPlant

Engineering Manager, in order to create drawings.

The Drawing Number, Name, & Template properties on a drawing are

always considered as Read/Write by Drawing Manager even when set to
Read Only within the Data Dictionary Manager. This is because these
properties are required when creating a drawing.

You can manage which properties appear within the Optional or Required
Field category through Options Manager > Settings (Drawing Properties –
Optional and Drawing Properties – Required).

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 51

Drawing Manager

Alphabetized Button - Select to display the drawing properties alphabetically.

This button acts as a toggle and is available when properties are displayed
categorically.

Categorized Button - Select to display the drawing properties in categories. This

button acts as a toggle and is available when properties are displayed alphabetically.

OK - Creates the new drawing, adds it to the selected plant node, and closes the New
Drawing dialog box. After entering the Drawing Number or Name you must select
or tab to another field. In order for the OK command to be enabled, values for all the
required properties must be entered.

Cancel - Closes the New Drawing dialog box without creating a new drawing.

Create - Creates a new drawing and adds it to the plant node. The New Drawing
dialog box will remain open. This button is available only after you enter values for
the Required Fields in the list of drawing properties. After entering the Drawing
Number or Name you must select or tab to another field. In order for the OK
command to be enabled, values for all the required properties must be entered.

52 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

Copy Command
The Edit > Copy command is used to copy one or more drawings from within the
same plant. The copied drawing(s) can then be duplicated using the Edit > Paste
command. To copy a drawing from one plant to another plant, refer to the Import
Drawing command.

Notes:

Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced prior
to using this command. A band-aid is a graphical representation in the
drawing to alert the user that something is wrong with the graphics in a
specific area within the drawing.

You must have the appropriate permissions, specified in SmartPlant

Engineering Manager, in order to copy drawings.

You can hold the Ctrl key, select a drawing, and drag it to a new location to
make a copy. You can also drag it to the current list view to make a copy.

A multi-rep model item is created at the target only once if the drawings that
contain all the representations for it are selected for copy in one session. If the
drawings are copied in separate sessions, the model item is re-created at the
target for that session.

Paired Off-Page Connectors (OPCs) in a drawing that are not copied (for
example, not in a select set) are placed in the plant stockpile. Paired OPCs in
a copied drawing have their relationships maintained by the copy. Paired
OPCs are not moved from the plant stockpile to a drawing by a subsequent
copy session.

A plant group item is created at the target only once if the drawings that
contain all its members are selected for copy in one session. If the member
drawings are copied in separate sessions, the plant item group is re-created at
the target for each session.

Paste Command
The Edit > Paste command pastes a copy of the selected drawing(s) in the selected
plant.

Notes:

You can change the name of a pasted drawing by selecting the drawing and
then selecting Edit > Properties.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 53

Drawing Manager

You must have the appropriate permissions, specified in SmartPlant

Engineering Manager, in order to paste drawings.

Paste a Drawing
1. In the Tree view, select the node where the copy of the drawing will reside.

2. In the List view, select the location that you want to paste the copy of the
drawing.

3. Click Paste on the main toolbar. The system displays the Transformation
Programs dialog box.

4. Click to select the Generate new sequence numbers if you would like new
sequence numbers to be created. Selecting the option causes existing tag sequence
numbers to be set to null for any item that has the property TagSequenceNo. The
null sequence number triggers the creation of new sequence numbers during
normal item tag validation. An exception to this is that the tag sequence number
for an instrument item is not set to null. Item tag validation does not generate a
new sequence number for an instrument. Instrument tags will be duplicated at the
target.

5. Click to select the Add value to the beginning of all sequence numbers to use
this option. Click in the provided field and enter the values you want to add at the
beginning of all your sequence numbers.

54 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

6. Click to select Keep existing if unique to use this option. If the sequence number
for a copied item is unique, it will be left as it was, but if a duplicate is detected,
the tag sequence number will be changed.

7. Click to place a check mark in the Clear piping material classification check
box to use this option. Selecting this option removes any defined piping material
class.

8. Click to place a check mark in the Clear process data check box to turn on this
option. Any values in the Process category will be removed.

9. Click to select the Plant item associations options that you want.

Re-associate all plant items with the target – All plant items,
regardless of their plant group associations in the source, are
associated with the target plant group of the copied drawing.
Retain existing plant item associations – All plant items retain the
same plant group associations that they had in the source. No changes
are made to the associations.
Re-associate items depending on original associations – Those plant
items that belong to the plant group of the drawing itself in the source
are reassigned to the target plant group. Those plant items that were
assigned to a different plant group from that of the drawing source
plant group retain their existing override associations.
10. Click OK. The system displays the Paste Drawings dialog box.

11. When the processes complete, click View Log to view the report or click Close to
dismiss the Paste Drawings dialog box.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 55

Drawing Manager

Move a Drawing
1. In the Tree view, select the node in which the drawing resides.

2. In the List view, select the drawing that you want to move.

3. Drag and drop the selected drawing to the new location.

Note:

If you drag and drop a drawing, which contains data, to another plant group,
you may need to change the Plant Group Name for those items utilizing the
Engineering Data Editor or the Property Grid in SmartPlant P&ID. This
depends on what was selected in Plant item associations on the
Transformation Programs dialog.

Delete Command
The Edit > Delete command allows you to delete drawings from the List view and
from the plant structure. Because a new version of the drawing is automatically
created when you delete a drawing, you can recover the drawing after you have
deleted it, but there are many drawing recovery ramifications to consider. See the
Recovering Drawings topic for more information on these ramifications.

You must have the appropriate permissions, specified in SmartPlant Engineering

Manager, in order to delete a drawing.

Delete a Drawing
1. In the List view, select the drawing that you want to delete.

2. Click Delete.

3. To confirm the drawing deletion, click Yes on the message box.

4. Click View Log on the Deleting Drawings dialog box to review notes from the
drawing deletion process.

Notes:

You can recover a deleted drawing using the Revisions > Fetch Deleted
Drawing command.

If a plant group has no drawings or plant items belonging to it, you can delete
that hierarchy item in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. Keep in mind,
though, that if you have associated a plant item with a hierarchy item by using

56 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

the Properties window in SmartPlant P&ID (or the EDE), then even though it
can look as if no drawings are associated with that plant group, you cannot
delete that hierarchy item in SmartPlant Engineering Manager.

You can also delete saved versions of a drawing, without deleting the drawing
itself using Drawing Manager > Revisions > Version History dialog box.

Properties Command
The Edit > Properties command opens the Properties dialog box, which displays
the plant group properties or drawing properties based on the item selected in the
Tree or List view.

Plant group properties are read-only. You can modify some of the drawing properties,
such as the name, version, title, and description.

Modify Drawing Properties

1. In the list view, select the drawing whose properties you want to modify.

2. Click Edit > Properties.

3. On the Drawing Properties dialog box, change or add drawing properties.

4. Click OK.

Notes:

You can rename and renumber a drawing, but keep in mind possible naming
conflicts that can arise when you retrieve a drawing under an older name.

You cannot modify some of the drawing properties after the drawing is
created. For example, the Template property value cannot be changed.

Opening Drawings
You can open drawings from either Drawing Manager or from SmartPlant P&ID.
When you open a drawing from Drawing Manager, the SmartPlant P&ID application
will launch and open the selected drawing. Since Drawing Manager is used to create
all the new drawings, this interface provides a quick and easy way to open the newly
created drawings in SmartPlant P&ID; allowing viewing or modification. You can
also open drawings directly from SmartPlant P&ID.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 57

Drawing Manager

Open Drawing Command

The File > Open Drawing command opens the selected drawings in SmartPlant
P&ID.

Open a Drawing from Drawing Manager

1. In the tree view, select the node where the drawing resides.

2. In the list view, click the drawing you want to open.

3. Click File > Open Drawing.

4. View or modify your drawing in SmartPlant P&ID.

Notes:

You may also use the Open Drawing command on the right-click menu. Or
you can double-click a drawing in the list view.

You must have the appropriate permissions, specified in SmartPlant

Engineering Manager, in order to view or modify drawings.

Open a Drawing in a Different Site from Drawing Manager

1. On the pull-down menu, click File > Open Database.

2. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, click Site Server.

3. On the Open Site Server dialog box, select the correct SmartPlant Initialization
file and click Open.

4. Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open.

5. Navigate to the correct drawing in the list view and select File > Open Drawing.

Open a Drawing in a Different Plant, same site from

Drawing Manager
1. On the pull-down menu, click File > Open Database.

2. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, select the correct plant and select
Open.

58 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Drawing Manager

3. Navigate to the correct drawing in the list view and select File > Open Drawing.

Open Drawings from SmartPlant P&ID

1. Open SmartPlant P&ID by clicking Start > Programs > Intergraph SmartPlant
P&ID > SmartPlant P&ID.

2. Click File > Open. The Open dialog box appears.

3. In the list, click a plant group to display the drawings it contains.

4. Click a drawing in the list, and then click OK. SmartPlant P&ID opens and
displays the selected drawing.

Open a Drawing in a Different Site from SmartPlant P&ID

1. On the pull-down menu, click File > Open.

2. On the Open dialog box, click the Open Database button.

3. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, click Site Server.

4. On the Open Site Server dialog box, select the correct SmartPlant initialization
file and click Open.

5. Select the correct plant on the Open Plant Structure dialog box and click Open.

6. Navigate to the correct drawing in the tree view and select OK.

Open a Drawing in a Different Plant, same site from

SmartPlant P&ID
1. On the pull-down menu, click File > Open.

2. On the Open dialog box, click the Open Database button.

3. On the Open Plant Structure dialog box, select the correct plant and select
Open.

4. Navigate to the correct drawing in the tree view and select OK.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 59

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing

Environment
SmartPlant P&ID provides multiple views of a central, unified data structure that
represents the plant model. A view is a visual presentation of the data that composes
the plant model and can be a schematic drawing or a table. The plant model is the
computer representation of the conceptual design in its entirety, including all plant
components and their relationships. By manipulating model views, you can organize
the information within the plant model to better understand and maintain the data.

SmartPlant P&ID's unique components work together to help make creating and
modifying P&IDs an easy task. The Design Window supplies a schematic
representation of the drawing. The Stockpile contains items that do not exist in the
P&ID but exist in the model. The Catalog Explorer provides the items that you can
insert in the drawing or model. The Properties window organizes the characteristics
of the current select set in spreadsheet style. And toolbars contain shortcuts to the
most commonly used commands.

As you work in SmartPlant P&ID, you can set various options for each of these
components to streamline your workflow. You can add buttons to toolbars, move
toolbars, and customize various windows in SmartPlant P&ID to meet your needs.
These customization features allow you to have your favorite, most-used options
available for immediate selection.

Arranging Work Space

You can arrange the workspace in several ways:

Move windows around on the screen.

Display, hide, or customize toolbars using the Toolbars command on the View
menu or the buttons on the main toolbar.

Move toolbars by dragging them with your mouse.

Move a ribbon to the top or bottom of the Drawing view.

Set viewing options for the window by using the Tools > Options dialog box.

Using the Window Menu

On the Window menu, you can select a variety of commands for customizing the
Design Window. Using these commands, you can create new windows for the

60 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Drawing View and the Engineering Data Editor. You can also cascade or tile these
windows to navigate among them more easily.

New Command
The Window > New command allows you to open a new Drawing View (Window >
New > Drawing) or Engineering Data Editor (Window > New > Engineering
Data Editor) window within the Design Window. You can open as many windows
as needed to support a design. Each window has its own independent set of properties
defining view range and display properties.

Important
Creating a new Drawing view or Engineering Data Editor of a drawing does
not create a new copy or version of the drawing. The same drawing data simply
displays in the different views.

Drawing (Window > New Command)

The Window > New > Drawing command creates a new Drawing View within the
active drawing. This command copies the contents of the active Drawing view into a
new window and displays the contents as graphical items. The new view has the same
filters as the previous Drawing view.

Notes:

You can change the view features for the new Drawing View window using
the commands on the View Menu.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 61

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

A new Drawing View is not the same as a new drawing. You must create new
drawings using SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Manager.
You can have as many Drawing Views open for a drawing as needed.
Drawing Views are named according to the name of the drawing file. For
example, the first drawing view created for the TestDrawing.pid file is named
TestDrawing.pid:1. Each subsequent Drawing View is assigned the next
consecutive number.

Engineering Data Editor (Window > New Command)

The Window > New > Engineering Data Editor command opens the Engineering
Data Editor in the Design Window and allows you to view and edit model data for a
drawing in a tabular format. You can define one or more Engineering Data Editors
for a drawing. The Engineering Data Editor displays drawing information in a table,
much like a Properties Window. In the Engineering Data Editor, you can specify
filters and layouts to define the table information and edit some item properties.

Note:

If only the Drawing View is open when you select Window > New >
Engineering Data Editor, the new Engineering Data Editor is opened on
top of the Drawing View.

62 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

You can use the commands on the Window menu to rearrange the windows.
The image below shows the Drawing View and the Engineering Data
Editor windows tiled vertically in the Design Window.

Cascade Command
The Window > Cascade command allows you to overlap windows diagonally across
in the Design Window.

Tile Horizontally Command

The Window > Tile Horizontally command allows you to arrange windows to fit
horizontally in the Design Window. All the windows are placed an even distance
from each other on the screen.

Tile Vertically Command

The Window > Tile Vertically command allows you to arrange windows to fit
vertically in the Design Window. All the windows are placed an even distance from
each other on the screen.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 63

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Maximizing the Design Window

You can maximize the Design Window to gain more workspace for your Drawing
View by closing the default Engineering Data Editor Window, the Properties
Window, and the Catalog Explorer Window. You can also resize these windows,
stack them on top of each other, or undock them. Undocking the windows allows
them to float, and then you can move them around on the screen as necessary. You
can also close the unwanted toolbars or design a custom one that contains only the
commands that you need.

Note:

If you have dual-screen monitors, then you can undock the windows
(Engineering Data Editor, Properties, and Catalog Explorer) and move
them to the other screen. This will dedicate the entire workspace between the
main toolbar and the status bar to the Design Window.

Using the View Menu

On the View menu, you can select a variety of commands for zooming in and out on
items in the Drawing view. You can also right-click anywhere in the Drawing view
to access many of these commands.

64 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Previous Command
The View > Previous command restores a Drawing View.

Notes:

To stop the repainting of items in the window, press Esc. This action is
convenient for large drawings.

To refresh the window, press F5.

Apply Display Set Command

The View > Apply Display Set dialog box specifies which symbols display in the
Drawing View. You can create filters that define which symbols you want to display.
Click View > Apply Display Set to open this dialog box. You can save these filters
and share them with other users working in the same Plant. You can also define
colors and widths for display items. If a display set is currently active, its name
displays in the lower right-hand corner of the product.

Add Folder- Adds an empty folder to the Tree. You can use Rename to define a
name for the folder. These folders can be used to organize display sets.

Add Display Set - Creates a new display set. You can use Rename to define a name
for the new display set.

Add Filter - Displays the Select Filter dialog box. Select any displayed filter to add
it to the current display set.

Save - Saves the selected display set.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 65

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Cut - Removes the selected display set and places it in memory.

Copy - Copies the selected display set into memory.

Paste - Pastes any values that are currently stored in memory.

Delete - Deletes the selected item.

Rename - Allows you to click on an item in the Tree and rename it.

Move Up - Allows you to move the selected filter name up in the list.

Move Down - Allows you to move the selected filter name down in the list.

Properties - Displays the properties of the filter.

Filter Name - Displays a list of filter names. These filters are defined using the Add
Filter command.

Color - Displays the color of the selected item for your display set. You can click in
the Color field to display a color palette and then select any color to define a new
color for any selected item(s). The default color square is defined with the crosshatch
pattern.

Width - Displays the selected display width of items defined in the selected filter. A
wider display width would cause the item to be more visible.

Note:

For more information about filters, refer to the Using Filters topic.

Clear Display Set Command

The View > Clear Display Set command removes the results displayed by selecting
the Apply Display Set command. This command is only active if a Display Set has
been applied to the drawing.

Zoom Area Command

The View > Zoom Area command allows you to zoom in on the Drawing view using
the pointer to fence the area that you want to zoom in on. The selection then fills the
view.

66 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Zoom In Command
The View > Zoom In command allows you to zoom in on the Drawing view using
the pointer. The selection then fills the view.

Zoom Out Command

The View > Zoom Out command allows you to zoom out from an area on the
Drawing view using the pointer that reduces the display of items around a specified
point in the active window.

Fit Command
The View > Fit command fits all visible items in the active view.

Pan Command
The View > Pan command allows you to move the display in any direction from a
specific point in a drawing to see other areas of the drawing by dragging the pointer
across the view.

Show Grid Command

The View > Show Grid command displays a grid so that you can place items with
precision. The grid is not considered part of the drawing and does not print.

Note:

You can change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options on
the Grid tab of the View Properties dialog box, which opens when you click
View > Properties.

Snap Grid Command

The View > Snap Grid command aligns items with the grid. The grid is a set of lines
in the drawing background that helps you align items. When you set the Snap grid
option, items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.
Grid lines do not print.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 67

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Note:

You can change the grid display by setting options on the Grid tab of the
View Properties dialog box, which opens when you click View > Properties.
To view grid lines at a finer level, set the style to Dynamic and adjust the grid
line width with the Density control.

Show Inconsistencies
The View > Show Inconsistencies command turns on or off the display of indicators
that identify inconsistent relationships in the active view. When View > Show
Inconsistencies is selected, inconsistent relationship indicators appear in the drawing.
If you do not want the inconsistencies to appear, click View > Show Inconsistencies
again to clear the selection of the option.

Note:

Also, you can right-click in an empty portion of the drawing in order to

display a shortcut menu. Select Show > Inconsistencies to toggle the display
of inconsistencies off and on.

Display Command
The View > Display command allows you to specify the windows, such as the
Catalog Explorer, Property Window and Engineering Data Editor; you want to
see in your design session.

Note:

Another method for displaying the Catalog Explorer, Property Window or

Engineering Data Editor window is to right-click the empty area in the main
toolbar and then select from the shortcut menu.

Toolbars Command
The View > Toolbars command opens the Toolbars dialog box. This dialog box
contains options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars.

68 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Toolbars - Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the toolbar that
you want to display, hide, or change.

Toolbar Name - Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.

New - Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box.

Customize - Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with the
Customize dialog box.

Reset - Returns the toolbar to the state that it was in at the beginning of your current
design session.

Color Buttons - Adds color to the toolbar buttons. Clearing this option causes toolbar
buttons to appear in black and white.

Large Buttons - Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.

Show ToolTips - Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when the

pointer pauses over one of them.

Properties Command
The View > Properties command opens the View Properties Dialog Box which
controls the display of information in the Drawing view.

Note:

You can access the View Properties dialog box by right-clicking in space in
your drawing and selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 69

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

General Tab (View Properties Dialog Box)

The View > Properties > General tab displays miscellaneous information about a
Drawing view, including the view name, description, and view type.

View name - Allows you to name the Drawing view.

Description - Allows you to enter a description of the Drawing view.

View type - Displays the type of view. This information is read-only.

Display Tab (View Properties Dialog Box)

The View > Properties > Display tab controls the display of items in a Drawing
view. Items that you can display include labels, drawing borders, grids, notes, and
inconsistency indicators. When you select the check box, the display toggles on for
that item.

70 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Do not show labels for filtered items - Prevents the display of labels in filtered
views of the design.

Show - Lists options for objects you want to appear in your Drawing view.

Labels - Toggles the display of all labels on or off, in any view. If the display of
labels is turned off here, the ‗Do not show labels’ option is not available since all
labels are no longer displayed regardless of the view tab that you are using.

Drawing borders - Toggles the display of the drawing border on or off.

Grids - Turns the grid display on or off.

Notes - Turns the display of notes on or off. Notes can contain links to a file, for
example, a Microsoft Word file.

Inconsistency indicators - Turns the display of inconsistency indicators on or

off.

Select - Includes other options for the selection of items in your drawing.

Prevent selection of inserted objects - Makes inserted foreign data non-locatable

in a drawing. For example, if you insert a file using Edit > Insert Object and do
not want to accidentally select that file in the drawing, select this box. The
inserted file appears gray in the drawing.

Retain Auxiliary Graphics colors – This option is available only if Prevent

selection of inserted objects is selected. If the drawing includes Auxiliary
Graphics, selecting this option displays the Auxiliary Graphics in their original
colors and prints them in those colors when printing the drawing. Choosing this
option has no effect on other inserted objects. When this check box is cleared,
Auxiliary Graphics appear as gray in the drawing and when printed.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 71

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Grid Tab (View Properties Dialog Box)

The View > Properties > Grid tab controls the behavior of the grid in the view.

View - Turns the grid display and grid snapping on or off. You do not have to display
the grid in order to snap items to it.

Show grid - Turns the grid display on or off.

Snap grid - Turns the snap-to-grid feature on or off. When you select this option,
items always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. Grid
lines are not printed.

Style - Specifies either Static or Dynamic grid style. A static grid displays solid grid
lines that do not move as you zoom in or out. When you zoom in or out of the
drawing, the grid lines for a dynamic grid change with the level of magnification. A
dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker, solid grid lines. The
choice of grid style affects the option that is available in the Spacing or Density box
and the availability of the Index options, too.

Spacing - Allows you to specify the space between the grid lines when you
choose the Static grid style from the Style list.

Density - Allows you to specify fine, medium, or coarse levels when you choose
the Dynamic grid style from the Style list. For a dynamic grid display the number
of index lines varies depending on the zoom level, and so you cannot change the
Index list when using the Dynamic grid style.

Index - Specifies the grid index, which is the number of minor grid lines. This option
is available only with the Static grid style.

72 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Inconsistency Indicators Tab (View Properties Dialog Box)

The View > Properties > Inconsistency Indicators tab controls the display of
inconsistency indicators, which signify the suitability of design work that you
perform while creating the drawing. The software verifies in real-time if the
composition of a drawing and the underlying data model satisfy rules defined in Rule
Manager. Choose the indicators and severities that you want to view in your drawing.

X Errors above severity - Turns the display of errors on or off. You can specify the
severity level. For example, if you specify a severity level of five, all errors with
severity of five or above appear. Errors are marked with a red X.

Warnings above severity - Turns the display of warnings on or off. Again, you
can specify the severity level and control the warnings that you see. Warnings are
marked with a blue / forward slash.

Approved warnings - Turns the display of approved warnings on or off.

Approved warnings are marked with green check mark.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 73

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Using the Tools Menu

System Editing Command

The Tools > System Editing command allows propagation of property values
between related items. When System Editing is enabled for a plant, changed property
values are automatically spread or propagated to related items according to the
currently defined consistency criteria. In certain cases, you may want to set a property
value on one item only and not allow it to be propagated to any related items. The
System Editing command (on the Tools menu and the toolbar) allows you to turn off
the propagation functionality temporarily during a design session. After the change
has been made, you can use this same command to turn it back on again. System
Editing is always turned on when you start a new design session. System Editing
can be enabled or disabled for the entire plant by means of the Enable System Editing
setting that is exposed through Options Manager.

Note:

To enable system editing for a design session select Tools > System Editing
or the System Editing button on the Main Toolbar.

Replace Mode Command

The Tools > Replace Mode command controls whether catalog items are placed as
substitutions for existing drawing items or placed normally. When this mode is active,
the software places catalog items only when they replace an existing drawing item.
When this mode is not active, the software places catalog items as usual. The
Replace Mode command will copy properties of the current item onto the new item.

74 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that you want to
replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment class, instrument class,
and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel with another vessel, but you
cannot replace a vessel with a pump. The software also takes into consideration the
connect points that are in use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you
cannot replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already
connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle with an
Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a pipe run, likewise for
angled valves. Replace Mode also works on parametrics. Resizing is maintained
during the replace if both symbols have an identical relative path.

The Replace Mode functions very much like Edit > Replace. However, the replace
mode works for only one item at a time and is not activated from inside a dialog box.

Notes:

You cannot use the Replace Mode for pipe runs or signal lines. If you need to
replace pipe runs or signal lines, use the Edit > Replace command.

With multiple representations you can use Replace Mode only if Equip Class,
Equip Subclass, and Equip Type are identical for the replaced and the new
item.

Replace an Item Using Replace Mode

1. Click Tools > Replace Mode or click Replace Mode on the main toolbar.

2. In Catalog Explorer, select the item that you want to place in the drawing.

Note:

You cannot use this mode to replace drawing items with items from the
Engineering Data Editor.

3. Move the selected catalog item over the drawing item that it is to replace.

Notes:

The Replace Mode command works for like objects only. The item that
you want to replace in the drawing must be of the same class: equipment
class, instrument class, and so forth. For instance, you can replace a vessel
with another vessel, but you cannot replace a vessel with a pump.

The software also takes into consideration the connect points that are in
use on the currently placed item. This stipulation means you cannot
replace an angled item for a straight item when the straight item is already
connected at both ends. For example, you cannot replace a Flanged Nozzle

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 75

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

with an Angle Parametric Nozzle if the nozzle is already connected to a

pipe run, likewise for angled valves.

If the drawing item can be replaced with the catalog item, the replace icon
is displayed, and the drawing item is selected.

4. When the replace icon appears, click to replace the drawing item with the selected
catalog item.

5. Continue to replace more items with your currently selected catalog item, or press
Esc to quit placement mode.

6. Click Tools > Replace Mode again to turn Replace Mode off.

Gapping Lines
A gap in a drawing is a condition that exists when two lines intersect graphically in
the drawing but not physically in the plant. In order to portray this condition, you can
specify that lines show a gap at these non-physical intersections.

You can either turn auto-gapping on, and the software gaps your lines automatically
as you route them, or you can choose when the software performs gapping on your
drawing by using the Gap Now command. Using the Gap Now command, instead of
turning on auto-gapping, can increase the efficiency of your design session.

Symbology and priority for your line gaps is set in Options Manager.

AutoGap Command
The Tools > AutoGap command turns automatic gapping on or off in the drawing.
When AutoGap is on, the software automatically gaps drawings during the working
session each time that you modify an item, when you print, or when you save a file. A
progress indicator at the bottom of the window alerts you to avoid selecting another
command while the software completes the gapping. The Gap Now command does
not affect the setting for AutoGap. When AutoGap is off, the software does not
automatically gap drawings. By default, automatic gapping is off.

Gap Now Command

The Tools > Gap Now command will perform line gapping in your drawing at the
time you select the command.

76 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Adding a Manual Gap to a Line

1. Select the appropriate gap from the Catalog Explorer.

Symbols > Piping > Gaps

OR

Symbols > Instrumentation > Gaps

2. On the line, click the position for one side of the gap.

3. Then on the same line, click the position for the other side of the gap.

Note:

Gaps are parametric symbols. You can resize the gap by dragging the
parametric handles.

Compare and Refresh Command

The Tools > Compare and Refresh command allows you to compare and refresh the
active drawing with data from another version of the drawing.

The current drawing and the chosen version are displayed side by side and the
differences will be marked in what is known as change groups. You will be able to
refresh any or all of the change groups.

Update Symbology Command

The Tools > Update Symbology command refreshes the graphic symbology of
symbols in your drawing based on the current settings in Options Manager. You can
force the software to redraw the graphic representation of your data, the drawing, by
using the Update Symbology command.

The symbology and other settings defined in Options Manager usually only take
effect in those drawings that are created after those values are defined. You can force
changes in Options Manager to appear in the current drawing by updating Options
Manager settings, regardless of when the drawing was created.

Notes:

Any user can update drawings using these commands. However, check your
permissions, which are assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager, to find
out if you can make changes to the plant-wide symbology in Options
Manager.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 77

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Once you load the current plant-wide definitions into your drawing, you
cannot revert to previous definitions. However, you can always override plant-
wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing filters and
choosing alternate symbology for items.

Updating Symbology
1. Open a drawing.

2. Click Tools > Update Symbology.

Notes:

The line width and color symbology for your active drawing is changed to the
most recent symbology defined in Options Manager. You do not have to
update symbology for this drawing again, even if you end your design session,
unless Options Manager symbology changes again.

Redefining symbology in Options Manager usually only affects drawings

created after the change. The Update Symbology command makes it possible
to override this constraint.

Once you load the current plant-wide symbology definitions into your
drawing, you cannot revert to previous definitions. However, you can always
override plant-wide symbology choices in your drawing by using drawing
filters and choosing alternate symbology for items.

SmartSketch Settings Command

The Tools > SmartSketch Settings command allows you to choose what
relationships are recognized by the software.

Note:

The relationships selected on the SmartSketch Settings dialog box are

recognized as you draw within Auxiliary Graphics and SmartPlant P&ID.

78 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Custom Commands
The Tools > Custom Commands opens the Custom Commands dialog box. You
can choose a macro and run it. Some macros are delivered with the software,
generally in the C:\Program Files\Smartplant\P&ID Workstation\Program directory.
You can also record your own macros and store them wherever you want to.

Customize Command
The Tools > Customize command opens the Customize dialog box, which allows
you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow. You can add or remove
commands on the toolbars or menus, or you can create new toolbars and menus.

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

The Tools > Customize > Toolbars tab is used to add or remove commands from the
toolbars.

Categories — Lists the categories of the toolbars that you can customize. Choose
one of the categories and the corresponding buttons appear in the Buttons area. You
can drag the button to any toolbar.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 79

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Buttons — Lists the buttons available in the active category. You can drag a
button from this area onto a toolbar.
Description — Describes the button selected in the Buttons area.

Custom Commands Category (Tools > Customize > Toolbars tab)

The Custom Commands category (Tools > Customize > Toolbars tab) allows you
to browse to a custom command (macro) and assign a toolbar button icon to the
macro. The Custom Button Dialog Box opens, when you drag the macro from the
list of Custom Commands to any toolbar.

To create a custom command button for the toolbar:

1. Click Tools > Customize.

2. On the Toolbars tab, select the category Custom Commands.

3. Click Browse.

4. Browse to the SmartPlant P&ID installation folder, and then click OK.

80 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

5. Select ExportLayer.dll and drag it to the main toolbar.

6. The Custom Button dialog box opens.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 81

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Custom Button Dialog Box

The Custom Button dialog box allows you to assign a toolbar button icon to a
macro.
Buttons — Displays the available icons.
Assign — Specifies the icon for your button and closes the dialog box.
Browse — Opens the Select Bitmap File dialog box, which allows you to
look for an icon on your local computer or on the network.

7. Choose a button to represent the ExportLayer.dll, and then click Assign.

The button representing the ExportLayer.dll displays on the toolbar.

8. Close the Customize window.

You can now run the ExportLayer.dll macro with a click of the button.

Menu Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

The Tools > Customize > Menu tab allows you to add or remove commands from
menus. You can add a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the
commands that you want.

82 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Categories — Allows you to specify the category that you want to select a command
or macro from. Then you can add the command or macro to the menu or main menu
bar. When you select the title of a group of commands in this box, you can click the
title of a command in the Commands list. When you select Macros in the
Categories list, you can select a macro from the Macros list.
Commands — Allows you to specify the command that you want to add to the menu.
Description — Displays a description of the command that you selected before you
add it to a menu. Descriptions do not appear for macros.
Preview (Menu Tree) — Lists the menus and their associated commands or macros.
To see all the commands on a menu, double-click a menu name or click the "+" next
to the menu name. When you click Add Command, Add Menu, or Remove, the
changes show up on the menu tree. Also, you edit menu and command names in this
view.
Place into selected menu — Overrides the default placement and places a command
or macro on the menu that is currently selected in the menu tree. If you do not set this
option, then the macros, commands, or menus are added at the level that is currently
open in the menu tree.
Add Command — Places a command on a menu. This button is available only when
you select a command or macro in the Commands box or Macros box.
Add Menu — Places a menu at the level currently open on the menu tree. When you
add a menu with this option, you can add commands to the new menu later. If you
add a menu to an existing menu, you create a cascading menu. After you click this
button, you can type the name that you want in the tree view and then enter it by
clicking any other location on the dialog box.
Browse — Opens the Select Macro Directory dialog box. When you select a folder
and click OK, the Macros list displays the macros for the folder that you selected.
The Browse button appears only when you choose Custom Commands in the
Categories list.
Macros — Allows you to specify the macro that you want to add to the menu. If you
select a macro, you can click Browse to change the folder for macros.
Reset All — Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings.
Remove — Removes the command or menu that you selected in the menu tree.

Options Command
The Tools > Options command sets options for the current drawing. It is used to
change settings that control recently used files, screen appearance, placement

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 83

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

information, and insertion of objects in the drawing, along with other options. The
Options dialog box opens when you click Tools > Options.

General Tab (Options Dialog Box)

The Tools > Options > General tab sets options for updating links in the drawing
and displaying the drawing, the status bar, and recently used files.

Update links automatically at open - Updates links automatically when a drawing is

opened.

Recently used files list - Sets the number of entries for the recently used files list on
the File menu.

Display as printed - Displays the drawing as it appears when you print it.

Show status bar - Displays the status bar at the bottom of the main window. When
you point at the command button on the toolbar, the description appears in the status
bar at the bottom of the window. Also, prompts that explain what to do at each step of
the command appear in the status bar, and messages about the operations the software
is performing appear in the status bar.

Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box)

The Tools > Options > Colors tab allows you to select options for the background,
highlight, selection, and handle colors in the drawing.

84 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Background - Sets the default background color for all Drawing views in the active
drawing.

Highlight - Sets the highlight color.

Selected items - Sets the color of selected items. The connect points in the drawing
appear in this color, too.

Handles - Sets the color of handles when an item is selected.

Use Defaults - Sets all the colors listed above to the default display value.

Note:

To set the symbology, (for example, the line weight and color) for item types
throughout a plant structure, use Options Manager.

Placement Tab (Options Dialog Box)

The Tools > Options > Placement tab allows you to set the default construction
status for the active drawing, and tolerances for locating items and moving around in
the drawing.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 85

Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Default construction status - Assigns the selected construction status to all placed
items. This list contains the following options: New, Existing, and Future. The plant
administrator sets the plant-wide default at setup, but this option allows you to change
the default on a drawing-by-drawing basis. The construction status for an item
appears in the Properties window when the item is selected. Also, the construction
status can be set for individual drawing items by changing its value in the Properties
window.

Locate - Specifies the range, called the locate zone, at which a candidate item is
highlighted when another item approaches. A candidate item is any item in the
drawing that meets the placement rules of the approaching item. For example, a pipe
run can be a candidate item, and a valve can be an approaching item to that pipe run.
The pipe is highlighted when the valve is within the locate tolerance. If you are not
placing an item but only selecting drawing items, the locate tolerance defines how
close that the pointer must approach in order to select the item.

Break-away - Sets the number of pixels at which an item disconnects from its parent
item. For example, to move a valve, you drag the valve. If you keep the pointer within
the break-away tolerance from the line, the valve does not disconnect from the line.

Place partner OPC in Stockpile - Specifies that when a new off-page connector
(OPC) is placed, the partner OPC is automatically stored in the Plant Stockpile.

Note:

If you clear this option, the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog
box appears after you place a new OPC. Using this dialog box, you can
indicate the drawing in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in
that drawing.

86 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Customizing the SmartPlant P&ID Drawing Environment

Files Tab (Options Dialog Box)

The Tools > Options > Files tab allows you to set options for inserting objects in the
drawing. These settings take effect in your next drawing session.

Scale reference files - Sets a scale option for inserting a reference file.

Coincident (1:1) - Imports a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at

full scale (1:1). This setting causes the reference file to appear temporarily in the
lower left of the drawing and determines a drawing scale that fits the reference
file within the drawing. The reference file is at the end of the pointer, ready to be
placed in the drawing, much like a catalog item during placement mode.

Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio
defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the object. For a 2:1 ratio,
the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents the size of the object.

Note:

The Fit to Sheet option in the Select Scale list determines a drawing sheet
scale that fits the reference file within the sheet but allows you to specify
where the file is inserted by clicking on the drawing sheet.

Custom Scale - Sets the scale for a reference file that you insert. For example,
when you type 3 and 2 in each of the respective boxes, the scale of the reference
file is one and one half times its original size.

My Reports - Specifies the folder where your user-defined, or personal, report

templates are stored.

Browse - Opens the Browse dialog box, which allows you to select a local or
network folder to store your user-defined reports and report templates.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 87

Using the Catalog Explorer

Using the Catalog Explorer

Catalog Explorer is an interface to view and manipulate an electronic catalog
containing drawing symbols and their associated properties. Conceptually, the
Catalog Explorer resembles a manufacturer catalog with pictures of parts to build a
plant. The paper catalog contains many items arranged in sections; you can search for
items or browse through the catalog and bookmark certain pages and sections.
Catalog Explorer replaces the paper catalog with an electronic equivalent. You can
browse the catalog tree view for drawing items that you need and create bookmarks
for important categories.

Catalog Explorer consists of two main views: the Tree view and the List view. In
the Tree view, you can view the hierarchy of nodes of the catalog file system and
open or close the nodes to see the contents. To open a node, click the "+" to the left of
the node name. To close a node, click the "-" to the left of the node name. If the
selected node contains any drawing symbols, the software displays them in the list
view. In the List view, you see the contents of the opened node. You also use the List
view to select catalog items before placing them in a drawing or in a stockpile. You
can create a navigation bar in the region between the tree and list views for shortcuts
to places throughout the catalog.

The Catalog Explorer toolbar buttons located at the top of the tree view access the
File, Views, and Buttons menus. The commands on these menus allow you to
customize the tree and list views of the Catalog Explorer to suit your work session.
After customization you can control the content and display of components in the
Catalog Explorer window. For example, you can control the display of icons in the
list view and define shortcut buttons that allow you easy access to user-defined
groups of catalog items.

88 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using the Catalog Explorer

File Menu
The Catalog Explorer > File menu provides access to commands that allow you to
manipulate list view items and tree view nodes in the Catalog Explorer. Also, you
can search for catalog items.

Find Command
The Catalog Explorer > File > Find command launches the Find dialog box,
allowing you to search the active catalog for a specific item based on user-defined
search criteria.

Named - Specifies the name of the item for which you want to search. You can type
an asterisk, "*", as a wildcard character to find multiple characters, or type a question
mark, "?", as a wildcard character for a single character.

Class - Specifies the class of item for which you want to search. You can select an
item class from the drop down list or search all classes using the asterisk ―*‖.

Look In - Specifies the drive or folder that contains the symbol library that you want
to search.

Browse - Opens the Explore Elsewhere dialog box, allowing you to search any
network drives or the local directory structure for a symbol library to display in
the Look In box.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 89

Using the Catalog Explorer

Results List (Item / Source) - Lists the items that met the defined search criteria.
You can drag catalog items from this area into a My Catalog set of items in the
Catalog Explorer tree view.

Find Now - Starts a search of the symbol library defined in the Look In: box.

Stop - Ends the current search.

New Search - Clears all search criteria in preparation for a new search.

Close – Closes the Find dialog box.

New Command
The Catalog Explorer > File > New command creates a new node under the My
Catalog > Toolbars node in the Catalog Explorer.

Note:

The My Catalog > Toolbars node must be selected in order for the New
command to be enabled on the File menu.

Delete Command
The Catalog Explorer > File > Delete command deletes a node under the selected
node in the Catalog Explorer.

Note:

This command is available for deleting nodes under the My Catalog >
Toolbars.

Rename Command
The Catalog Explorer > File > Rename command will rename a node under the
selected node in the Catalog Explorer.

Note:

This command is available for renaming nodes under the My Catalog >
Toolbars.

90 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using the Catalog Explorer

Refresh Symbol Toolbar Command

The Catalog Explorer > File > Refresh Symbol Toolbar command activates plant-
or user-level symbol toolbars or updates the symbol toolbars to incorporate any
modifications to a toolbar.

Send to Stockpile Command

The Catalog Explorer > File > Send to Stockpile command sends the catalog item
selected in the list view to the Stockpile. This command is particularly useful for
instrument loops and packages and other items that reside in a stockpile but generally
are not depicted graphically in a drawing.

Note:

This command is available when you select a symbol in the List view.

Send to Drawing Stockpile Command

The Catalog Explorer > File > Send to Drawing Stockpile command sends the
catalog item selected in the list view to the Active Drawing Stockpile. This
command is particularly useful for instrument loops and packages and other items
that reside in a stockpile but generally are not depicted graphically in a drawing.

Note:

This command is available when you select a symbol in the List view.

Views Menu
The Catalog Explorer > Views menu provides commands that allow you to control
the display format of catalog items within the Catalog Explorer list view.

Large Icons - Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a larger format.

Small Icons - Displays the icon for an item in the list view in a smaller format.

List - Displays the icon and name for an item in the list view in a simple list.

Details - Displays the icon, name, and file location for an item.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 91

Using the Catalog Explorer

Buttons / Navigation Menu

The Catalog Explorer > Buttons menu or Navigation menu provides commands
that allow you to control the display and assignment of shortcut buttons within the
Catalog Explorer. Shortcut buttons provide shortcuts that bookmark a node in the
active Tree view of Catalog Explorer. These buttons reside on the navigation bar
between the tree and list view in the Catalog Explorer window.

For example, if your workflow requires you to route a lot of piping, you want to make
a shortcut button to the Process Lines node. Then when you open Catalog Explorer
and click this shortcut button, you open the node for the piping and all the piping
types appear in the list view. Consequently you save the time and effort of browsing
the catalog node structure in the tree view in order to find the node that you want to
open in the list view.

The software does not limit the number of shortcut buttons that you can create, but
you are limited by the size of the Catalog Explorer window. Also, shortcut buttons
are shortcuts to catalog nodes only. If you want to make a shortcut to a particular
symbol that you use a lot, you can use the symbol toolbar.

All of the commands for managing your shortcut buttons are found on the Buttons
/Navigation menu.

Add Button - This command adds a shortcut button to Catalog Explorer for the
active tree view node. For example, if you frequently select nozzles, you may add a
shortcut button to the nozzles node of the Catalog Explorer tree view by selecting
Nozzles in the tree view and then choosing Add Button from the menu that appears
when you click the down-arrow of the Buttons / Navigation menu. The option Show
Buttons in the menu must also be selected in order for your shortcut button to appear
between the tree view and list view windows of Catalog Explorer.

Remove Button - Removes the active shortcut button from the list of shortcut buttons
in Catalog Explorer.

Show Buttons - In Catalog Explorer Navigation menu, a check mark next to the
menu item indicates that shortcut buttons appear in Catalog Explorer. The buttons
appear on the navigation bar between the tree and list views.

Designing Symbol Toolbars

Symbols toolbars allow you to create toolbars that contain the symbols you use most
frequently, keeping them conveniently located for easy access. Symbol toolbars can
be plant specific or user specific. With the most often used equipment,
instrumentation, or piping symbols, for example, your symbol toolbars can streamline
your work considerably. The symbol toolbars can be docked on any side of the main
window.

92 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using the Catalog Explorer

You can define up to two levels of toolbars. There is no limit on the number of
symbols in a toolbar. For example, you can create a Vessels node under Toolbars, and
under Vessels you can create Vertical and Horizontal. You cannot create another
level under that. A divider appears in the toolbar between levels.

If you are an administrator or have Full rights to Catalog Manager, you may define
project specific symbol toolbars in Catalog Manager. All users in a project will see
project specific toolbars. Any user may define user specific symbol toolbars in
SmartPlant P&ID. That user will only see user specific symbol toolbars.

The toolbar definition is stored in the ~:\Documents and Settings\<Your Login>\My

Catalog\<Plant Name>\Toolbars\<Toolbar Name> folder.

Define a User Level Symbol Toolbar

1. In the Catalog Explorer tree view, open the My Catalog node.

2. Right-click on the Toolbars node under My Catalog.

3. Click New on the shortcut menu.

4. Enter a name for the new toolbar.

5. In the Catalog Explorer list view, find symbols you want to place on your new
toolbar.

6. Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar in the tree
view.

7. When you have added all the new symbols you want to the new toolbar, right-
click on the name of the toolbar, and click Refresh Symbol Toolbar. The new
toolbar will appear on the left side of the window.

Notes:

You can dock the symbols toolbars on any side of the main window.

You can define up to two levels of toolbars. For example, you can create a
Vessels node under Toolbars, and under Vessels you can create Vertical and
Horizontal. A divider appears in the symbol toolbar between levels.

Plant-level symbol toolbars are created in the Catalog Explorer using

Catalog Manager.

You must have the proper permissions, granted in SmartPlant Engineering

Manager, to create symbol toolbars.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 93

Using the Catalog Explorer

Define a Plant Level Symbol Toolbar

1. Open Catalog Explorer.

2. In the Catalog Explorer tree view, open the Symbols node.

3. Right-click on the Toolbars node. If no Toolbars node exists, create a Toolbars

folder in your Symbols directory, and refresh the view.

4. Click New on the shortcut menu.

5. Enter a name for the new toolbar.

6. In the Catalog Explorer list view, find symbols you want to place on your new
toolbar.

7. Drag symbols from the list view and drop them into the new toolbar node in the
tree view.

94 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Equipment and Equipment Components

Placing Equipment and Equipment

Components
You can place various types of equipment in your drawing, such as vessels, towers,
boilers, heat exchangers, and reactors. You also place equipment components in
drawings. Equipment components are items associated with pieces of equipment,
such as nozzles and trays.

As you place equipment components, the software automatically creates a group

relationship between the equipment and the component. As a group, the components
move when you move the equipment. However, you can only associate an equipment
component with a single piece of equipment. When you place an equipment
component, the component is associated with the last selected or highlighted piece of
equipment, creating an equipment group.

Depending on the rules defined for the equipment or equipment component, you can
have limits to the possible placements for the equipment. For example, specific trays
can be flagged for placement inside the piece of equipment, and nozzles can be
flagged for placement outside the piece of equipment. Rule Manager defines rules
that determine the way that model items interact during manipulation.

The software includes a standard group of equipment and equipment component

symbols. However, you or your plant administrator can change and add to these
symbols as needed for your plant.

Note:

The software continually updates the database as you edit a drawing; however,
the software does not update the drawing file until you actually save the file
(when you click File > Save or when you exit the program). Occasionally, the
software can end in an abnormal way, for example, due to a power outage. As
a result, the database is up-to-date with changes that you posted to the
drawing, but the drawing file reflects the status when you last saved the
drawing. When you re-open the drawing, the software recognizes that the
drawing file is different from the database and needs to be recreated. The
following message is displayed: ―One or more items in this drawing are
inconsistent with the database. Click OK to re-create the drawing from the
database.‖

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 95

Placing Equipment and Equipment Components

Place Equipment
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the equipment that you want to place.

2. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing.

3. Position the item and release to place it.

Notes:

In addition, you can click the item in the Catalog Explorer list view and then
click the appropriate point in the drawing to place the item. Press Esc to quit
placement mode. Or, you can escape placement mode by right-clicking.

Placing items by drag and drop are not cyclical. Placing items by clicking to
select and clicking to place are cyclical – that is, you will continue to be able
to place the item until you right-click or click Esc.

4. In the Properties window, enter values for the equipment properties in the
appropriate rows in the table.

Parametrics
Parametric items have yellow handles that allow the item‘s size and or shape to be
changed. Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric
items. Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have
been applied to an item. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions:
top center, bottom center, left center, and right center of the range of an item. You can
scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle. The software shows
you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item
correctly.

Scaling
Scaleable items have black handles that allow the item‘s size to be changed
proportionally.

Note:

An equipment item should not be defined as both Scalable and Parametric.

96 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Equipment and Equipment Components

Placing Multiple Representations

If the same piece of equipment needs to be represented more than once, perhaps for a
detailed or alternate view, in a P&ID plant, you may place multiple representations of
the item using the Engineering Data Editor. You may think of a multiple
representation as a child item associated with the parent item that already exists in
another drawing. You are permitted only a single representation of an item in any
ONE drawing.

Note:

The Replace command will replace a multi representation symbol providing

the definition attributes for source (parent) and target (child) are identical.
The definition attributes are ―Equipment Class‖, ―Equipment SubClass‖, and
―Equipment Type‖. Symbols can be replaced either using the single Replace
command or the Find and Replace dialog.

Steps to Place Multiple Representations

1. Open a drawing and place an Equipment Vessel.

a. Symbols > Equipment > Vessels > Vertical Drums

b. Define a value for the Tag Prefix and note the value for Item Tag, this will
make it easy to locate in the Engineering Data Editor.

2. Exit the Drawing.

3. Open another drawing that is a target for your Multiple Representation of an

item. (Do not open the drawing with the parent item at all.)

4. Find the parent item in the Engineering Data Editor by clicking the Other
Drawings button and choosing an item type from the list that best describes the
type of item you want to represent. (e.g. Equipment)

5. In the Engineering Data Editor, right-click on the icon at the far left of the
parent item.

6. Select Place Multiple Representation from the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 97

Placing Equipment and Equipment Components

7. Drag your cursor into the Drawing View and Click the location in the drawing
where you need to place the Multiple Representation.

Equipment Reference Data

In the delivered reference data, the following equipment categories exist under
Equipment:

Black Box System: Contains a single black box symbol.

Heat Transfer Equipment: This category contains heat transfer equipment such
as exchangers, cooling towers, heaters, or boilers.

Labels – Equipment: This category contains labels that may be placed on all
equipment as well as a description category containing description labels for specific
equipment types.

Mechanical: This category contains pumps, compressors, separators, or packaging

equipment.

Other Equipment: This category contains civil (such as sumps and manholes),
sound (such as silencers), and other electrical equipment.

Vessels: This category contains vessels such as reactors, towers, drums, tanks or
silos.

98 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Equipment and Equipment Components

Place Equipment Components

1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the equipment component that you want
to place.

2. Drag the equipment component to the equipment that you want it related to until
the equipment highlights.

3. Position the equipment component and release to place it.

Notes:

If you need to place an equipment component so that it is associated with

equipment but not attached to it, you can do the following.

1. Attach the equipment component to the equipment that you want it

related to.

2. Select the equipment component.

3. While holding down the Alt key, drag the equipment component an
arbitrary distance away from the equipment.

For internal placement of equipment components on equipment, you drag the

equipment component to the interior of equipment and place it. For example,
Flanged Nozzle-Internal, Nozzle-Internal, and Pump Nozzle-Internal can all
be placed internally in a tank. If you want the nozzle opening facing to the
right, approach the tank from the right when placing the nozzle. In other
words, the opening of the nozzle will be placed in the direction that you
approach the tank during placement.

Components will have a placement style determined by Rule Manager. The

default for trays is to place inside a piece of equipment while nozzles
automatically place on the outside of the graphics.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 99

Placing Equipment and Equipment Components

Equipment Components Reference Data

In the delivered reference data, the following equipment component categories exist
under Equipment Components:

General: This category contains demisters, weirs, and vortex breakers.

Heating Components: This category contains components such as air cooler
fans, bundles and coils, burners, cooling tower cells, ducts, louvers, and some
miscellaneous labels.

Labels – Equipment Components: This category contains labels that may be

placed on equipment components such as nozzle id, item tag, and Material of
Construction.

Mechanical Components: This category contains mechanical components

such as screens, separators and buckets and scales.

Nozzles: This category contains a variety of nozzles, including flanged nozzles,

manways, and instrument connectors.

Trays: This category contains a variety of trays including bubble cap trays, generic
trays, pans, sieve and chimney trays, and valve trays.

Vessel Components: This category contains components specific to vessels

such as beds, distributors, domes and boots, and some miscellaneous components.

100 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Routing Piping and Signal Lines

Routing Piping and Signal Lines

The same basic procedures can be followed when you route or manipulate piping or
signal lines. After you select a piping or signal line from the Catalog Explorer list
view, you can use the commands on the Line Routing ribbon to help construct or
modify the line.

Lines consist of a series of line segments. The software places handles, represented
by black squares or dots, at each segment vertex along the line route. You can use
these vertex handles to move, reroute, or connect lines. You can add vertices to add
segments to the line using the commands on the Line Routing ribbon.

The software also provides a shortcut menu associated with lines. Right-click a line
and choose from several commands. You use this menu to break runs or join runs.
You can also use this menu to construct select sets of pipe runs.

Line Connectivity
When a new pipe run is placed such that it connects to existing pipe runs at either
end, those pipe runs are automatically joined together if they have the same
properties. All the information about pipe runs also applies to signal runs.

The symbol placement command creates a new line when an inline component is
placed directly up against an existing nozzle or other inline component. The pipe run
created in this way has a zero length connector that attaches the two symbols.

Pipe runs that only have zero length connectors are joined up with the pipe runs they
attach to; the properties for pipe runs with zero length connectors need not match.
The zero length pipe run that gets created when one inline component is placed
directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the existing
pipe run, too.

When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that belongs to an
existing pipe run, the new pipe run is automatically joined with the existing pipe run.

When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of an existing
connector, the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually merged with
the existing connector. The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both
placement and modification of connectors. At the time that the connection is made,
the two pipe runs are tested for compatibility. If they pass the property criteria, they
are automatically joined together.

If two pipe runs have different properties, they are not automatically joined together.
If you want them joined together, the Join Runs command is available for this
purpose. When two pipe runs with differing properties are joined into one, the
properties of the surviving pipe run are retained and the others are discarded.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 101

Routing Piping and Signal Lines

Similarly, if you must define two different properties for two parts of a single pipe
run, then the pipe run must be broken. The Break Run command is available for this
purpose.

Auto Join
Pipe runs are automatically joined together whenever possible. When a new pipe run
is placed, and it connects to existing pipe runs at either end, those pipe runs are
automatically joined together if they have the same attribute values. Pipe runs that
only have zero length connectors are joined with the pipe runs they attach to. (The
attribute values for pipe runs with zero length connectors do not need to match.)
This means that both the bottom-up and the top-down approaches produce the same
final result. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at a component that
belongs to an existing pipe run, the new pipe run is automatically joined with the
existing pipe run. When a new pipe run is placed that starts or ends at the endpoint of
an existing connector, the two pipe runs are joined and the new connector is actually
merged with the existing connector.

The automatic joining takes place in the same way for both placement and
modification of connectors. At the time the connection is made the two pipe runs are
tested for compatibility. If they pass the attribute criteria, they are automatically
joined together. The zero length pipe run that is created when one inline component is
placed directly up against another inline component is automatically joined to the
existing pipe run. Pipe runs always consist of a linear sequence of members and never
include any branches. Placing a pipe run that branches off of an existing pipe run does
not cause them to be joined together. Reducers are always located at the end of a pipe
run and never in the middle. Placing a new pipe run that connects to a reducer does
not cause the pipe runs to be joined.

Route a Line
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view select the line that you want to place.

Notes:
This action displays the Line Routing ribbon and starts line placement
mode.

Press Alt while routing a line or click Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the Line
Routing ribbon to override the current line vector and allow routing in any
direction and at any angle.

2. Click a connect point on an item in the drawing.

102 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Routing Piping and Signal Lines

Note:
You can click an empty point in the drawing to start the line, too.

3. Click to place the vertex at the next point in the line.

4. Continue clicking to place the vertices of the line in the drawing.

5. When the line is complete, right-click to confirm the placement.

Note:
You can escape line placement mode by right-clicking two more times.

Modify a Line Using Vertex Handles

1. Click an existing line in the drawing.

2. Click the vertex handle of the line route that you want to move.

3. Drag the vertex to a new position in the drawing and release.

Note:
While moving the vertex handle to modify the line segment, click
Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the Line Routing ribbon or press Alt to allow
the line segments to move freely at any angle.

Line Routing Ribbon

The Line Routing Ribbon appears when you select a line element from the Catalog
Explorer list view or the Engineering Data Editor or when you select an existing
line in a drawing. You can dock the Line Routing ribbon in the main toolbar; it
remains there for the current design session unless you move it again.

Diagonal Mode (Alt)

The Diagonal Mode (Alt) command allows you to route lines in any direction,
instead of the usual constraint of horizontal or vertical line routing. Selecting the Alt
key while routing a line will also route a line at an angle. This procedure is usually
popular with signal and utility lines, but you can use it for any line routing.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 103

Routing Piping and Signal Lines

Insert Segment
The Insert Segment command causes the software to insert line segments instead
of routing new lines or instead of moving existing lines.

Insert Line Segments into an Existing Line

1. In the drawing, select the existing line that you want to insert a segment into.

2. On the Line Routing ribbon, click Insert Segment.

Note:

Instead of clicking Insert Segment, you can hold Shift while moving a line
to insert segments.

3. Drag the selected line to the new position.

Break Run
The Break Run command allows you to break a pipe run. After you break the
run, select the pipe run and select Edit > Properties to enter or change any property
values.

Break a Pipe Run

1. In the drawing, right-click the pipe run that you want to break.

2. On the Line Routing ribbon, click Break Runs or on the shortcut menu, click
Break Runs.

Notes:
To activate the shortcut menu, select the pipe run and right mouse click.

In the drawing, click the point where you want to break the run. The
software breaks the selected pipe run into two separate runs at the
selected point.

Join Runs
The Join Runs command allows you to join two pipe runs into one pipe run.

104 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Routing Piping and Signal Lines

Join Pipe Runs

1. In the drawing, right-click the first pipe run that you want to join.

2. On the Line Routing ribbon, click Join Runs or on the shortcut menu, click Join
Runs.

3. In the drawing, click the second pipe run to join the two runs

Notes:
If you join two pipe runs with different properties and both pipe runs have
the same number of components, the resulting pipe run has the properties
of the pipe run according to the routing ―to connection‖ prior to using the
Join Runs command.

For example, if the pipe runs are connected or pulled together from left to
right and then joined together using the Join Runs command, the
properties on the right pipe run will be copied to the left pipe run. If the
pipe runs are connected or pulled together from right to left and then
joined together using the Join Runs command, the properties on the left
pipe run will be copied to the right pipe run. If the pipe runs are connected
or pulled together from top to bottom and then joined together using the
Join Runs command, the properties on the bottom pipe run will be copied
to the top pipe run. If the pipe runs are connected or pulled together from
bottom to top and then joined together using the Join Runs command, the
properties on the top pipe run will be copied to the bottom pipe run.

If you join two pipe runs with different properties and the pipe runs have
an unequal number of components, the software copies the properties from
the pipe run with the greater number of components to the pipe run with
the fewer number of components.

You can change values for the properties of the new run by clicking the
pipe run and then entering the values in the appropriate rows in the
Properties window. If the Properties window does not appear, you can
display it by clicking the line and then selecting Edit > Properties on the
main menu bar.

Heat Tracing
Heat tracing is an intelligent property of piping. To graphically show the heat tracing
for a pipe run, set the HT Medium (heat tracing medium) property to a value such as

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 105

Routing Piping and Signal Lines

E or ST. The heat tracing will automatically display for that line and all components
on the line.

Note:

The linestyle and orientation of the heat tracing is set in Options Manager.

Pipe Jacket
To jacket pipe, you must open Options Manager and make sure that a heat trace
medium is selected in the Heat Trace Media - Jacketed Pipe property. Also, for
specifying pipe jacket nominal diameters, a file name and path for the Pipe Jacket
Nominal Diameter Configuration File property must be entered, and then you can
enter the relevant values on the Options Manager > Tools > Pipe Jacket Nominal
Diameter dialog box.

When a pipe is jacketed, there is no insulation on the pipe itself. The ―Insulation‖
properties in the Property Grid do not apply to this type of pipe.

The jacketed line is not insulated, it is jacketed. The jacket, which has a different
nominal diameter than the pipe, can be insulated and it can have an insulation
nominal diameter and an insulation purpose. You would set these values in the
―Piping Jacket‖ section of the Properties Grid (J_Insulation Nominal Diameter and
J_Insulation Purpose). This section appears in the Property Grid when you use a
Jacketed Pipe Heat Trace medium.

Piping Reference Data

In the delivered reference data, the following piping categories exist under Piping:

Gaps: This category contains manual gap symbols.

Labels – Piping Segments: This category contains labels that may be placed
upon piping segments indicating a property value such as flow direction, line number
label, MOC note, piping material class, and slope.

Routing: This category contains process and utility lines such as primary,
secondary, and hose.

106 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

Placing Piping Components

Piping components are graphic elements that represent processes or functions within
a particular piping segment. Piping components include valves, flanges, reducers, and
strainers. In drawings, piping components are connected with lines.

Generally, piping components automatically orient themselves when you drag them
near an existing pipe segment. For example, if you drag a horizontal valve to a
vertical pipe, the valve automatically orients itself vertically. If several possible
orientations exist for the piping component, you can use the Configuration tool, or
PickQuick, to review the possible placements for the component and select a final
orientation for the item. Rule Manager defines rules that determine the way that
model items interact during manipulation.

As you place piping components, the software automatically creates a relationship

between the pipe route and the component to create a pipe run. When you move the
pipe run, the pipe route and the associated piping components both move. Your plant
administrator can modify the relationships between piping components and piping in
Rule Manager.

The software includes a standard group of piping component symbols. However, your
plant administrator can change and add to these symbols in Catalog Manager as
needed.

Place a Piping Component

1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the piping component that you want to
place.

2. Click the item and place onto the appropriate pipe run in the drawing.

3. Position the item and release.

4. In the Properties window, enter values for the properties of the piping
component.

Notes:

As you drag piping components over a pipe run, or the pointer passes over
runs while you are in placement mode, the pipe run is highlighted. If you
place a piping component when a pipe segment is not highlighted, the piping
component is placed in free space if the placement rules allow the action.

If you want to move a piping component but preserve its connection to the
pipe run, you can use the Alt key as you drag the component. Then even if

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 107

Placing Piping Components

you drag the component away from the line, the line routes itself so as to
preserve its connection to the component.

Configuration (PickQuick) Tool

In addition to using the manipulation handles to orient an item after you place it, you
can use PickQuick to select the orientation of some items, such as check valves or
flow arrows or other inline items, when you are placing them. Pausing after you drag
the item to the appropriate place in the drawing activates the Configuration tool, if it
is available for the selected item, and allows you to select the proper orientation for
the item.

Note:
PickQuick helps you to select items that overlap each other.

Place an Item With the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool

1. Drag the item to the appropriate position on the line.

2. Pause until ellipses appear beside the pointer.

3. Click to display the Configuration toolbar near the pointer.

4. Move the pointer over each toolbar button to preview the available orientations.

5. When the appropriate orientation is displayed, click the corresponding button on

the Configuration toolbar to place the item in that orientation.

108 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

Select an Item Using the Configuration (PickQuick) Tool

1. Pause the pointer over the item that you want to select.

2. When the pointer appears with ellipses, click.

3. On the PickQuick toolbar, which appears near the pointer, move the pointer over
the numbered PickQuick buttons, without clicking, to highlight the way the item
will be placed when selected.

The first item is highlighted.

The second item is highlighted.

4. When the item that you want to select is highlighted, click the corresponding
button on the PickQuick toolbar.

Placing two components (valve and reducer) end to

end
1. Drag the end of the item (Reducer) over the item (Gate Valve) until the black
handle appears.
Black Handle

2. Click to place the item or continue to pause to receive the Configuration toolbar.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 109

Placing Piping Components

Placing two components (nozzle and piping flange)

end to end
1. Notice that the piping connect point is off the face of the Nozzle. This piping
connect point will be the point which the flange will connect too.

Equipment Piping Connect Point on Nozzle

Nozzle

2. Notice that the flange also has a piping connect point off the face of the Flange.
This piping connect point is the point which connects to the point on the Nozzle.

Piping Connect Point on Flange

Flange placed in free space

3. Drag the item (Flange) to the appropriate position on the Item (Nozzle).

4. Pause the item (Flange) over the item (Nozzle) until the black handle appears.
Equipment Flange

Black Handle
Nozzle

5. Click to place the item or continue to pause to receive the Configuration toolbar.

Piping Connect Point of Nozzle and Flange are connected

110 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

Notes:

If you want to be able to place two inline components an arbitrary distance

apart, regardless of minimum distance settings in Options Manager, do the
following.

1. Place the first component in the line.

2. Place the second component into the line and connect it to the
connect point of the first component on the end that you want to
attach to.

3. While holding down the Alt key, drag one component along the line
away from the other leaving the desired distance between the two.

If the components are already close to each other but not connected at
coincident connect points, you must drag one off of the segment to disconnect
it and then move it back to get the connect points attached.

Break Components
Piping components and in-line instruments can be defined in the catalog as break
components. When a break component is placed into a pipe run, the pipe run is
automatically broken at that point. Break components inherently limit the copying
and suppress the consistency checking of certain properties. For example, a reducer is
a break component for the Nominal Diameter property. When changing the Nominal
Diameter in a pipeline, the spread of that change is limited by any reducers that exist
in that pipeline. The consistency checking that would normally occur between the
connected pipes is also suppressed at the reducer.

A break component can be created for any property or collection of properties of a

pipe run. To create a break component, you must first create a special filter. This filter
must apply to pipe runs and must include the properties to be broken as criteria in the
filter. The value for each property in the filter is not important. The final step in
creating a break component is to open the symbol in Catalog Manager and select the
Property Breaks command to select the filter. When a break component is placed
into a drawing, it breaks the properties specified in the filter.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 111

Placing Piping Components

Using Off-Page and Utility Connectors

Off-Page and Utility Connectors graphically represent the continuance of a line
from one drawing to another. A connector is not actually a label but more like a
component that includes a label. Placement behavior for a connector is very similar to
a standard piping component label. OPCs, utility connectors, and piping components
can be inserted into a line.

The drawing needs a connector when a line run continues on another drawing. The
minimum information in the label portion is the drawing name to which the connector
points and the connector number. Connectors do not have a property for flow
direction, although most connectors use an arrowhead to indicate direction. When you
place a connector, it does not set or respond to flow direction. The connector
represents continuation; not flow.

When you place a connector in a drawing, the property for the drawing name is not
defined. The partner in the stockpile reflects the drawing name in which its match
was located. When you place the partner from the stockpile, the first connector is
updated to reflect the drawing name where you placed the partner connector. As a
result, you never need to type a drawing name, and the software guarantees a valid
match.

You cannot change the drawing name in the labels; the value is automatically
assigned by the software. However, you can change other properties.

If you copy a connector, the software must generate new connector numbers and add
a partner to the stockpile. The ‗drawing name‘ property changes to Null or
Undefined for the copied connector.

Types of OPCs
In Catalog Explorer, the Off-Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs are available for
instruments. For process lines, there are two types of connectors available: Off-
Drawing or Off-Unit OPCs and Utility Connectors. The correct symbology
differentiates OPCs.

Change Default Storage Location for Partner Connector

When you place the first OPC connector of the pair, the software places the partner in
either the Stockpile or the stockpile of another drawing of your choice. The default
placement for the partner is into the Stockpile.

Place partner OPC in stockpile indicates that when a new off-page connector, OPC, is
placed, the partner OPC is automatically stored in the stockpile. If you clear this

112 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

option, the Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box appears after you place
a new OPC. Using this dialog box, you can indicate the stockpile or drawing stockpile
in which the partner OPC is stored until you place it in that drawing. The Set
Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box allows you to select the stockpile or
a drawing stockpile into which the partner of the new connector is placed.

1. Click Tools > Options

2. Select the Placement tab.

3. Select or clear the Place partner OPC in stockpile option.

4. Select OK

Orientation of OPCs
OPC pairs have a to and from orientation. The software does not use the graphical to
and from distinctions, but reading the drawing is easier for you with this
differentiation. The OPC has two ends; a start end and a finish end.

The OPC (#116) below is a "to" connector since its connected point appears at the
"finish" end of the off-page connector. The OPC (#115) below is a "from" connector
since its connected point appears at the "start" end of the off-page connector.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 113

Placing Piping Components

Note:
To switch between to and from orientations, you must disconnect the OPC
from the line and then rotate or mirror it. Then you can reconnect the line to
the other end of the OPC. At the time of placement, you can pause when
placing the OPC and wait for the PickQuick toolbar in order to choose the
correct orientation.

Place an OPC or Utility Connector

1. Select the connector you want to place from the list view in Catalog Explorer.

2. Click the location in the drawing where you want to place the connector.

114 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

Notes:
You can place a connector in free space on the drawing and route a line to it,
or you can place it at the end of a line that is already drawn.

If you are placing a connector in free space, rotate or mirror the OPC after
placement in order to get the correct orientation. Then route the line to it.

If you are placing a connector at the end of an existing line, you can pause and
wait for the PickQuick toolbar so that you can choose the correct orientation.

3. The Set Stockpile Location of Partner OPC dialog box opens after you place a
connector on a drawing, unless you have selected the Place partner OPC in
Stockpile option on the Placement tab of the Options dialog box.

Plant Groups - Displays the hierarchical tree representation of the plant.

When you select a node, the drawings associated with that node appear in the
Drawing list area.

Stockpile - Displays a list view of all the drawings associated with the
selected node in the Plant Hierarchy tree. Choose a drawing stockpile from
this view to place your partner OPC if you are not placing the OPC in the
plant stockpile.

4. Select the stockpile location for the mating OPC.

Select the Stockpile (Plant) or a specific Drawing Stockpile

5. Select OK

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 115

Placing Piping Components

Open Continuation Drawing Command

When the partner of the selected Off-Page or Utility Connector is in a drawing or a
drawing stockpile, this command opens that drawing. This command is not available
if the partner connector is located in the Stockpile for the plant.

1. Select the OPC or Utility Connector for which you want to view the drawing
where the partner is located.

2. Right-click the connector.

3. From the shortcut menu, select Open Continuation Drawing.

4. Select Window > Tile Horizontal command to view both drawings.

Using Utility Connectors

The Utility Off-Drawing Piping Connector and a Utility Connector symbols are
delivered in the Catalog Explorer. You will need to use both connectors to graphically
differentiate the utility connectors on the utility header drawing versus the drawing.
However, when you place one of these connector types (Utility Off-Drawing Piping
Connector or Utility Connector), the mate will automatically have the same
graphics as the one you placed. To maintain the relationship between the two
drawings and use two different symbols, you will need to use the Replace command
to overwrite the graphics of one of the connector symbols after placement.

1. Create a Utility Header Drawing and define a value for Fluid Code on the pipe
run in which you will be placing the Utility Off-Drawing Piping Connector.

116 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

2. Place the Utility Off-Drawing Piping Connector on the pipe run in which you
defined a value for Fluid Code.

3. Place the mating Utility Off-Drawing Piping Connector from the Stockpile
onto the drawing. This shows the connection to the utility header drawing.

4. Turn on Replace Mode either from Tools > Replace Mode or from the toolbar.

5. Click on the Utility Connector symbol in Catalog Explorer that you are using to
replace the Utility Off-Drawing Piping Connector.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 117

Placing Piping Components

6. Select the Utility Off-Drawing Piping Connector that you just placed. This will
change the graphics of the item to the Utility Connector symbol while
maintaining the relationship to the connector on the other drawing.

7. Deselect the Replace Command when finished.

Notes:

Placement of new items will not be permitted until you deselect the
replace command.

This procedure does not work for Off-Drawing and Off-Unit OPCs.

Delete Behavior of OPCs

If the OPC pair is on drawings, you can Delete a connector from the drawing, and the
software moves it to a stockpile and updates the properties of its partner; the Delete
from Model command is dimmed.

If the OPC you are deleting is on a drawing and the mate is in the Stockpile, then the
Delete and Delete from Model commands are active; selecting Delete will delete the
select OPC and place it in the Stockpile, select Delete from Model will delete the
pair of OPCs (the one from the drawing and the one residing in the stockpile) from
the SPPID environment.

If the OPC pair resides in the stockpile to remove them from the stockpile select the
Delete Stockpile Item from the EDE commands.

Piping Component Reference Data

In the delivered reference data, the following piping component categories exist under
Piping:

118 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Placing Piping Components

Fire and Safety: This category contains fire and safety components such as
hydrants, monitors, shower and eyewash, and sprinklers.

Fittings: This category contains reducers, end components, flanges, spacers, and
other pipe fittings.

Labels – Piping Components: This category contains labels that may be

placed upon piping components indicating a property value such as commodity code,
nominal diameter, opening action, and reducer nominal diameter.

Macrocomponents: This category contains macro components that represent

one or more piping components such as vents, drains, and connections.

Piping OPCs: This category contains off-page connectors for off-drawing, off-
unit and utility connectors.

Relief Devices: This category contains pressure relief devices.

Segment Breaks: This category contains piping segment break labels indicating
a point where certain properties change value such as temperature, pressure, piping
materials class, and supply responsibility.

Specialty Components: This category contains specialty components such as

floats, strainers, vents, silencers, and arrestors.

Valves: This category contains a variety of valves including 2 Way Common (such
as gate valve, globe valve), 2 Way Other (such as knife valve and instrument root
valve), 3 Way, 4 Way, and Angle.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 119

Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation

Creating Instrument Loops and Placing

Instrumentation
You can place various types of instrumentation in your drawing, such as orifice
plates, flow controllers, and pressure regulators. Instruments are devices used directly
or indirectly to measure or control a variable, such as flow or temperature, in a plant
process. Instruments can be items such as flow control elements, computing devices,
or electrical switches.

Instrument loops are a group of one or more instruments or control functions arranged
so that signals can transfer from one function to the next to measure and control a
process variable. You can create instrument loops containing any combination of
inline and offline instruments. No loop association is required prior to placing an
instrument.

Two types of instruments exist: inline instruments and offline instruments. Offline
instruments may or may not have implied items. Implied items are items that are
placed in the database when another item is placed (for example, an offline
instrument may imply the placement of an instrument root valve). Signal lines are
intelligent line strings that connect offline instruments, inline instruments, and piping.

Creation of Instrument Loops

To associate an instrument or group of instruments with a loop, you use the Loop
Tag property.

Note:
No loop association is required prior to placing an instrument.

1. From the Catalog Explorer tree view Loops node, right-click the instrument loop
that you want to create.

120 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation

2. Select Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing Stockpile from the shortcut menu.

3. Define properties for the loop by entering values in the Properties window. The
software automatically generates an item tag when you enter a tag suffix.

Placement of Inline Instruments

Inline instruments are components that you can insert into a piping segment. Inline
instruments include instrument valves, such as pressure regulator valves, flow
controllers, flow indicators, and other instrument components, such as orifice plates.
Inline instruments will place in a line. As you drag inline instruments over a pipe
segment, the pipe segment appears highlighted. If you place an inline instrument
when a pipe segment is not highlighted, the instrument is placed in free space.

1. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile, click the inline instrument
that you want to place.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 121

Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation

2. Drag the item to the appropriate line in the drawing.

3. Position the item and release it.

4. In the Properties window, specify properties of the inline instrument in the

appropriate rows in the table.

Notes:
As you drag inline instruments over a pipe run, the pipe run appears selected.
If you place an inline instrument when a pipe segment is not selected, the
instrument is placed in free space if rules defined in Rule Manager allow such
a placement.

If the item you place has multiple possible orientations in relation to other
items, you can use the Configuration tool, or PickQuick, to select the
appropriate placement for the item.

While placing an inline instrument on a pipe run with associated heat tracing,
if the pointer is below the pipe run, then the heat tracing appears above the
instrument and vice versa – regardless of the heat tracing orientation on the
piping. By keeping the pointer either above or below the piping, you can
decide the orientation for the heat tracing on the inline instrument at
placement time.

Validation takes place between the pipe run and the inline components on that
pipe run with the result that you may see some properties values being copied
from the pipe run to the inline component.

Placement of Offline Instruments

Offline instruments are components that you do not insert into a piping segment.
Typically, these instruments monitor and control inline instruments. Offline
instruments include flow controllers, level gauges, and system functions such as
digital control stations (DCS) or computers.

Signal lines are used to connect offline instruments to other instrument components
and instrument connectors, or to connect offline instruments and other signal lines to
pipelines, piping components, and equipment nozzles.

1. In the Catalog Explorer list view or the stockpile, click the offline instrument
that you want to place.

2. Drag the item to the appropriate place in the drawing.

3. Position the item and release to place it.

122 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation

4. In the Properties window, specify properties of the offline instrument in the

appropriate rows in the table.

Notes:
If you place an offline instrument over an existing signal line, the software
inserts the offline instrument in the signal line, just as piping components are
inserted into pipe runs.

After you place offline instruments, you can connect them to piping segments
or inline instruments using signal lines.

After you place items, you can mirror, rotate, or move them.

Add Instruments to a Loop

1. Select the item that you want to associate with the instrument loop.

2. Select the Calculation button in the Loop Tag property for the instrument in
the Properties window.

3. On the Loop Tag dialog box, enter characters in the Search for box in order to
display the available loop tags. Loop tag may appear in drop down if Loop
Function = Measured Variable

The Loop Tag dialog box (Properties Window) allows you to Search for and
specify the loop tag for the item whose properties currently appear in the
Properties window. This dialog box opens when you click the Calculation
button next to the Loop Tag property.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 123

Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation

Search for - Allows you to type in descriptors to display the available loop
tags, limited by parameters that you enter here. The percent character, %, is a
wildcard. For example, if you want to list only loop tags that contain the letter
F, you could type %F% in the Search for box. If you want to display all
available loop tags, simply type %.

Search Now - Finds and displays the loop tags that match the criteria in the
Search for box. You can choose a tag from the main window and click OK in
order to assign the tag to the item whose properties currently appear in the
Properties window.

4. Select Search Now.

5. Choose the appropriate loop from the resulting list.

6. Select OK. (Or you can double-click on the loop to both select and accept the
selection.)

Remove an Instrument from a Loop

1. In the drawing, select the item or items that you want to remove from the loop.

2. In the Properties window, remove the value for the Loop Tag property for the
selection.

Notes:

When an instrument is assigned to a loop, validation automatically creates an

instrument item tag. If you remove the loop tag property, the instrument item
tag remains the same until the instrument is assigned to a new loop or until
you remove the property values manually.

You can remove an instrument from a loop by deleting the item from the
model, too.

Instrumentation Reference Data

In the delivered reference data, the following instrument categories exist under
Instrumentation:

Actuators: This category contains a variety of actuators, including diaphragm,

manual, and solenoid, which may be placed upon in-line instruments.

Gaps: This category contains manual gap symbols.

124 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Creating Instrument Loops and Placing Instrumentation

In-Line: This category contains a variety of in-line instrument components

including orifice plates, flow nozzles, flow instruments, silencers, control valves and
regulators.

Instrument OPC’s: This category contains off-drawing and off-unit connectors.

Labels – General Instrument: This category includes component labels such
as tags, remarks, and accessories.

Labels – In Line Instruments: This category includes in-line instrument

component labels including set points, responsibilities and requirements.

Labels – Off Line Instruments: This category includes component labels,

including requirement, responsibilities and IDs, for offline components.

Loops: This category contains default loops that may be used including loops for
temperature, pressure, flow and level as well as a typical loop.

Off-Line: This category includes functions, with implied components, and without
implied components. Functions include average, bias, and root functions. With
implied includes components involving flow, level, temperature and pressure.
Without implied includes single- and multi-functions, solenoids, and pilot lights.

Relief Devices: The category contains relief devices that are attribute-breaking
for diameter, temperature and pressure.

Signal Line: This category contains specific types of instrument signal lines
including electrical, mechanical, pneumatic, and hydraulic.

System Functions: This category contains system functions including DCS and
PLC functions.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 125

Selecting Drawing Items

Selecting Drawing Items

You can select items or groups of items using the Select Tool and the Polygon Fence
Locate commands on the main toolbar. You can select items such as piping,
equipment, valves, and labels, and you can select groups of items, assemblies, or
embedded or linked objects.

Select Tool Command

The Select Tool command from the Main toolbar changes the pointer to the
arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can select, modify, and manipulate items.
The circle at the end of the pointer arrow is the locate zone.

Note:

While the Select Tool is active, the Select Tool Ribbon is displayed.

Select Tool Ribbon

The Select Tool Ribbon appears when nothing is selected. After
you select an item, the Select Tool ribbon is replaced with a ribbon for editing the
selected item.

Inside - Specifies that items inside the fence are selected.

Overlapping - Specifies that items both overlapped by the fence and inside the
fence are selected.

Top Down - Specifies that symbols are recognized in the locate zone as opposed
to individual elements in a symbol.

Bottom Up - Specifies that individual elements, which make up symbols, are

recognized in the locate zone as opposed to the whole symbol.

126 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Selecting Drawing Items

Polygon Fence Locate Command

The Polygon Fence Locate command from the Main toolbar works similarly to
the Select Tool. You can create a select set by drawing a rectangular or polygonal
fence around objects based on points that you define. You can click to place the first
point, click the remaining points; defining the rectangle or polygon. Points are placed
when you release the mouse button. Then, you can right-click to end the fence.

Note:

While the Polygon Fence Locate is active, the Polygon Fence Ribbon is
displayed.

Polygon Fence Ribbon

The Polygon Fence Ribbon appears when you select the Polygon Fence Locate
command from the Main toolbar.

Rectangle — Creates a select area, or fence, by drawing a rectangle around points

that you define. When you drag the mouse to define a rectangular fence, a dashed
rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. When you reach the desired
size, release the mouse button to create the fence. The dashed fence outline
disappears and the elements are selected.

Polygon — Creates a select area, or fence, by drawing a polygon around points

that you define. Click to place the first point, click the remaining points to define the
polygon. Points are placed when you release the mouse button. Right-click to end the
polygon. The dotted outline disappears and the elements are selected.

Inside — Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected.

Overlapping — Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are selected, as

well as elements inside the fence.

Top Down — Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to

individual elements in a group.

Bottom Up — Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as

opposed to the whole group.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 127

Selecting Drawing Items

Turn Filter On/Off — Turns the filter on or off. When the filter is on, the Locate
Filter is active.

Locate Filter — Opens the Define Locate Filter dialog box where you can
specify a filter for the selection of specific drawing elements. Filters allow you to
select specific types of drawing elements, or all drawing elements.

Selecting Single Items

To select an item, click the Select Tool on the main toolbar. When you click the
Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate zone indicator at the end.
As you pause on items in a drawing, the items appear in the highlight color. When an
item is highlighted, click to select it.

When you select an individual item, the following things happen:

The item changes to the selection color. You can change the selection color with
the Options command on the Tools menu.

The handles of the item appear if the item has handles. Handles are solid squares
at significant positions on a selected item, such as end points and center points.
Handles allow you to directly modify the item, such as dragging a handle to
change the shape of the item. Although you can select more than one item at a
time, only one item can have handles at a time.

If the item is linked or embedded into the current drawing, selecting it allows you
to double-click it for editing. ―Prevent selection of inserted objects‖ on the View
> Properties > Display tab must be unchecked in order for you to be able to select
inserted items.

When you select multiple items or grouped items, the items change to the selection
color.

You can also select drawing items by first selecting them in the Engineering Data
Editor. The corresponding items are selected in the Drawing view if they reside in
the active drawing.

Select an Item
1. On the main toolbar, click the Select Tool.

2. To select an item or items, perform one of the following:

To select one item, click it.

128 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Selecting Drawing Items

To select more than one item, hold Shift or Ctrl and click each item or drag to
fence the objects.

To select one of several overlapping items, use PickQuick.

3. To clear the selection of an item or items, perform one of the following:

Click or right-click in an empty portion of the drawing.

Select another item without holding Shift or Ctrl.

4. To clear the selection of one item and leave other items selected, perform the
following:

Click the item while holding Shift or Ctrl.

Notes:
When the Select Tool is active, selectable items are highlighted as you pass
the pointer over them. When the item you want to select is highlighted, click
to select it.

Click Tools > Options to change the item highlight and selection colors and
locate and break-away tolerances.

To select all items in a drawing, right-click a blank area in the drawing and
click Select All on the shortcut menu, press Ctrl + A, or click Edit > Select
All.

You can also select items in the Engineering Data Editor. If they reside in
the active drawing, they will be highlighted.

Selecting Multiple Items

You can select more than one item at a time by clicking Select Tool and then holding
Shift or Ctrl as you click the items that you want to select. Additionally, you can
click the Select Tool and then drag to fence items.

You can use the Select Tool Ribbon to choose if you want to select only items
completely enclosed by the fence or any item that is partly enclosed by the fence.
Many manipulation commands, like Delete, Move, Copy, and Rotate, can act upon
all items in the select set.

If you select multiple items in the Engineering Data Editor, these items are also
selected in the active drawing, if they reside there. You construct a select set using the
Engineering Data Editor in this way.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 129

Selecting Drawing Items

Note:
Whenever you have constructed a select set, you can choose single items from
that set by using the Selected Items list at the top of the Properties window.

A single item chosen in a select set this way is highlighted in a different color
in the Drawing view.

130 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Selecting Drawing Items

Canceling the Selection of Items

To cancel the selection of an item or group of items, click any empty point on the
drawing.

Selecting Connected Items (Edit Menu)

You can use the Edit > Select Connected Items command to navigate the line
connectivity from a selected line segment to components and other runs; constructing
a select set based on matching properties. Using this command, it is possible for the
software to continue constructing a select set beyond a break in a line, for example, a
nozzle.

This functionality is useful for finding branches from runs and finding all the runs and
components on an entire drawing that have a common property value. Once the items
are selected in the drawing, it is then a simple matter to choose the select set in the
Properties window and continue editing properties for not only runs, but also lines,
networks and all runs included in the drawing.

The Select Connected Items command appears both on the Edit menu and on the
Line Shortcut menu. This command opens the Select Connected Items Dialog Box.

Select Connected Items Dialog Box

The Select Connected Items Dialog Box allows you to construct a select set from
lines and inline components, even if there are breaks in a network. This dialog box
remains open until you dismiss it, and you can highlight items in the drawing and
manipulate members of the select set while the dialog is active.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 131

Selecting Drawing Items

Scope - Provides options for defining the extent of your select set. The Scope List
allows you to choose the extent. The Include Runs and Include Components
buttons allow you to incorporate different items into the select set. One or both of the
buttons must be selected (Include Runs or Include Components); that is, one or the
other or both is always active.

Scope List - Allows you to choose from Run, Line, Network, and Drawing. The
default value for this list is Line.

Notes:
The Run option means that lines in a single run are selected.
The Line option selects runs that are connected at end points, including
components.
The Network option adds branches.
The Drawing option selects all the runs and inline components in the open
drawing.

Include Runs - Incorporates lines into the select set.

Include Components - Adds inline components into the select set.

Matching Properties - Displays options for defining the select set according to
common properties. The properties for the originally selected item are displayed by
default.

Alphabetic - Lists properties in alphabetical order.

Categorized - Displays properties grouped by specific categories. By default

the properties are displayed categorically. Categories are defined and properties
are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager.

Preview - Highlights in the Drawing view the items that are selected
according to common properties in the Properties List of this dialog box.

Properties List - Allows you to choose common properties for your select set. You
can select more than one property in this list by using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

132 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Selecting Drawing Items

Create a Select Set from a Line

1. Select a single line segment or inline component in the drawing.

2. Click Edit > Select Connected Items.

3. On the Select Connected Items dialog box, you can change the scope of the
select set by changing the display in the Scope list.

4. You can change the scope to include inline components or exclude lines, too, by
using the Include Runs and Include Components buttons.

5. At any time, you can select a different line segment or component in the drawing
in order to change the properties displayed in the dialog box.

Note:

The properties for the new selection are displayed in the Select
Connected Items dialog box, but the display of the Properties window
itself is not updated until you click OK.

6. If you want to construct a select set based on common properties, select those
properties from the Properties list in the Matching properties area of the dialog
box.

Notes:
You can use the Ctrl or Shift buttons to select more than one property
value.
You can choose an empty property value for matching criterion, too.
If no properties are displayed in the dialog box, select a line segment or
component in the drawing that already has a property value you know you
are interested in.
7. Click the Preview button to see the items that qualify according to the matching
criteria chosen in the previous step. The matching items are highlighted in the
Drawing view.

8. Once you have selected the items you want for your select set, click OK. The
selected items are centered in the Drawing view.

9. Use the Selected Items list in the Properties window to display the common
properties for the select set.

Note:

If you click Cancel, the Select Connected Items dialog box closes, and
the original item is selected in the drawing.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 133

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

After you place items in a drawing, you can modify the items in several ways. You
can move items or groups of items from one location to another in the drawing. If you
want to change the orientation of items, you can mirror and rotate most items. You
can also move groups of items to another open drawing in the same plant hierarchy.

Depending on the rules defined for particular items in the drawing, limits exist for
possible placements. For example, specific trays can be flagged for placement inside
a piece of equipment, and you can only move these inside the equipment. Rule
Manager defines rules that determine the way that model items interact during
manipulation. The software processes rules defined for items as you move them, as
well as you place them.

You can resize or scale parametric items by using their parametric handles. Resizing
parametric items maintains certain characteristics of the item, such as angles between
elements of the symbol, while it allows modification of other characteristics of the
item, such as the length of its sides. Many items are now scalable, too, and can be
resized by using their scale handles.

You can modify the properties of each item by selecting the item and changing
individual properties in the Properties window. Also you can edit some item
properties in the Engineering Data Editor in the Design window by selecting a table
cell and filling in the appropriate information. You can select an entire row by
clicking on the corresponding row number to the left of the table and then viewing the
properties in the Properties window and editing them there.

If you want to remove an item from a drawing, you can delete the item. If the plant
model requires the deleted item, the item appears in the stockpile for later placement.
If the plant model does not require the item, it disappears from the drawing
completely. You can permanently remove required items from the plant model using
the Delete from Model command.

134 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Manipulating Items with Component Handles

Many components allow you to change their shape or orientation using component
handles. Component handles allow you to rotate or mirror a component around axes,
and you can use component handles to scale or resize parametric items in a drawing.
Items can have several different types of component handles.

The mirror handle allows you to mirror about the horizontal and vertical axes,
defined in relation to the origin of the item. You can mirror items by dragging the
mirror handle in the appropriate direction. The software shows you the result of the
operation dynamically so that you can be sure to mirror the item correctly.

The rotate handle provides a mechanism for rotating components around their
origin. You can rotate items by dragging the rotate handle in the appropriate
direction. The software shows you the result of the operation dynamically so that you
can be sure to rotate the item correctly.

Parametric handles allow you to modify different parts of parametric items.

Standard parametric handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have been
applied to an item. Parametric handles can be located in four standard positions: top
center, bottom center, left center, and right center of the range of an item. You can
scale the item parametrically by dragging any parametric handle. The software shows
you the result of the operation dynamically so that you can be sure to scale the item
correctly.

Scale handles allow you to change the scale of a drawing item. A scalable symbol
displays four solid square scale handles. A handle is displayed at each corner of the
range of the symbol. You can drag any one of the handles, and the symbol scales
either larger or smaller depending on the direction that you drag the handle.

Notes:

Not all drawing items can be mirrored, rotated, or scaled. Catalog Manager
defines these properties for items when the symbols for the items are created.

Select sets cannot be mirrored or rotated with component handles. The

Mirror and Rotate commands on the toolbar can be used for select sets.

Mirror an Item Using Its Mirror Handle

1. Select an item in the drawing.

2. Click the mirror handle .

3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the item.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 135

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Rotate an Item Using Its Rotate Handle

1. Select an item in the drawing.

2. Click the rotate handle .

3. Drag the rotate handle in the direction that you want to rotate the item.

Note:

You can click the rotate handle closer to or further from the center of the
item to change the step angle for the rotation.

Scale a Parametric Item

1. Select the parametric drawing item that you want to resize.

2. Drag one of the parametric handles in the middle of each side of the item to
change the size of the item.

3. Continue dragging the parametric handles until the item is the size that you want.

Note:

Certain properties of the parametric item, such as angle values, remain the
same when you resize it.

Scale a Drawing Item

1. Select your scalable item in the Drawing view.

2. Drag any one of the handles to make the symbol either larger or smaller,
depending on the direction that you drag the handle.

Notes:

A scalable symbol includes four solid square scale handles. A handle is

displayed at each corner of the range of the symbol.

Scalable symbols are created by setting the IsScalable property of the symbol
to True in Catalog Manager.

136 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Moving Items
You can move items in a drawing using the Select Tool or the Move Button. You can
move a line using vertex handles. You can move an item or group of items to another
drawing.

Move an Item Using the Move Command

Select one or more items.

Select the Edit > Move command or on the main toolbar, click Move/Copy.

Click to define the from point

Click to define the to point or define the Step Distance or X and Y location in the
Move Ribbon.

Notes:

If you want to copy the items, press Ctrl when you place the item.

If you move an item that owns other items, the owned items move also. For
example, if you move a vessel that owns trays and nozzles, the trays and
nozzles move with the vessel.

You can drag an item without using Move. Select the item and then drag it to
its new location. If you want to copy the item, press Ctrl while you drag.

If you want to move an item to another drawing, move it to the Stockpile,

open the second drawing, and place the item from the stockpile or use the
Move To Drawing command.

You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom, Fit, and
Pan, while you are using the Move command. When you finish manipulating
the view, the software returns you to the Move command at the point where
you were when you started manipulating the view.

Note:

When you use the Pan command to manipulate the view, you can right
click to exit the Pan command and return to the Move command.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 137

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Move Ribbon

The Move Ribbon

appears on the main toolbar when the Move or Move/Copy command is active, and
allows you to either specify moving options or to observe moving options.

Specifies the from point and to point when you move items.

Copy - Copies the items in the select set when you move them.

Step Distance - Increases or decreases the value in the ribbon boxes. For example,
typing a step value of 0.25 and pointing away from the from point increases the
distance in discrete steps, from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and so forth.

X - Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the x-coordinate,
or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object.

Y - Allows you to enter an explicit value for the distance to move in the y-coordinate,
or you can simply observe the value as you drag the object.

Move an Item With the Select Tool

1. On the main toolbar, click the Select Tool .

2. Position the pointer over the item but not over any of the handles of the item.

Notes:

Dragging a handle modifies the item instead of moving it.

When the Select Tool is active, selectable items are highlighted as you
pass the pointer over them. When the item you want to select is
highlighted, click to select it.

3. Drag the item to its new position.

Move To Drawing Command

The Edit > Move To Drawing command allows you to move a select set of drawing
items into another open drawing. These conditions must be met in order for this
command to be available:

The source and destination drawing must be open, and neither of these
drawings can be read-only.

The drawing objects to be moved must be selected.

138 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

The selected items must not have a connection to any items outside the select
set.

You must have the appropriate permissions to modify the items in the select
set.

If more than one possible destination drawing is open, the Move To Drawing dialog
box appears, and you can select the appropriate destination drawing.

The Move To Drawing command manipulates the select set in order to make sure the
selected items are appropriate items to move. The command removes these objects
from the select set:

Inserted OLE objects are automatically removed from the select set.

Title blocks are automatically removed from the select set.

If there is a label in the select set and the item that it labels is not in the select
set, that label is removed.

If there is a dependent object (such as a nozzle, equipment component,

actuator, or item note) in the select set, and if the parent object that it is
dependent upon is not in the select set, it is removed.

The command expands the select set to include the following objects:

If there are labels that are not in the select set but are attached to objects in the
select set, these labels are automatically added to the select set.

If there are dependent objects (such as a nozzle, equipment component,

actuator, or item note) not in the select set but they are dependent on objects in
the select set, these objects are automatically added to the select set.

OPCs and connected items can now be moved to a different drawing. After
the OPC has been moved, the partner drawing is out-of-date because the OPC
information needs to be updated. Opening the drawing or running the Update
Drawing command updates the OPC and removes the out-of-date status.

Move To Drawing Dialog Box

The Move To Drawing Dialog Box allows you to choose the destination drawing
that you want to move your item(s) into. This dialog box displays only when you
have more than one possible destination drawing open. You must also have the
item(s) selected that you want to move. Then, click Edit > Move To Drawing and
click in the drawing to define the Select from point. The Move to Drawing dialog
box displays. It contains a list of possible drawings that your item(s) can be moved
to. Select the drawing and click OK.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 139

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Available drawings - Lists the open drawings that are available to be a destination
for the Move To Drawing command. Those drawings that are not included in the list
are the source drawing, open read-only drawings, open drawing templates, and open
assemblies.

Move a Select Set to Another Open Drawing

1. Open the destination drawing if it is not already open.

2. Select the items that you want to move into the destination drawing.

3. Click Edit > Move To Drawing.

4. In the Drawing view, click the from point.

Notes:

For the purposes of placement in the destination drawing, the from point
becomes the origin of the select set.

While you are using a from point (or to in the destination drawing), the
pointer is a crosshair.

5. If more than one possible destination drawing is open, then select the desired
destination drawing from the Available Drawings list on the Move To Drawing
dialog box.

In the Drawing view of the destination drawing, click the to point.

Copying Items
Copying an item makes it possible to use a drawing item that is already in place as a
starting point for placing a new item, without removing the current item from the
drawing. Several methods exist for doing this, such as using the Copy button on the
main toolbar or using Ctrl while you move, mirror, or rotate a drawing item.

Remember that placement rules are in effect when you are copying an item to a new
location, just as they are when you originally place an item from a stockpile or from
Catalog Explorer. So a copied nozzle must be placed on a piece of equipment, for
instance.

140 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Copy an Item Using the Copy Command

The Edit > Copy command copies selected elements and their associated
relationships to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the previous
contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.

When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared among the
elements are also copied. However, when you copy an element that shares a
relationship with an element that you are not copying, the relationship is not copied.

1. Select an item.

2. On the main toolbar, click Copy.

Notes:

After you copy an item, it is placed on the Clipboard. Then you can use
Paste to place it on the current drawing. When you paste the item, the
software frequently pastes it on top of the item that you copied. To see the
pasted item, drag it to its new location in the drawing.

You can copy an item with the Move command , too. Select the item,
click Move on the toolbar, and press Ctrl as you place the item in the
drawing. You can do the same with a select set.

Copy an Item With the Select Tool

1. Click Select Tool on the main toolbar.

2. Select an item.

3. Position the pointer over the item, but not over any of the handles of the item.

4. Hold Ctrl and drag the copy to its new location. Placement rules are in effect, and
so you must place the copy in an allowed position as if it were a new catalog item.

Copy Labels
After a label has been placed, a user may copy that label and place it on another item
in the drawing. The user would select the label, right-click and choose Place New.
This will start the label placement process, using one or two-point placement and
other placement characteristics for the label.

1. In the Drawing view, select the label that you want to copy.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 141

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

2. Right-click the label and select Place New from the shortcut menu or click
from the Run Macro toolbar.

3. Associate the new label icon that appears at the end of the pointer with the new
item by highlighting the item and clicking.

Finding and Replacing Drawing Items

The software has the ability to find items and inconsistency indicators in your
drawing. You can define search criteria based on a catalog item or an item type
already in place in your drawing. Or, you can define criteria based on a delivered
filter or on a user-defined filter. Having found all drawing items of a certain type, you
can modify their properties or reposition them or even replace them with an item of a
compatible type.

The software also searches your drawing for inconsistency indicators so that you can
review and correct inconsistencies systematically.

Replacing drawing items is straightforward, too. You have the capability to replace a
single drawing item with a comparable item, replace many items one-by-one, or even
replace all items of one type at the same time.

When you find or replace drawing items, the selected items are added to a select set,
and so you can view the common properties of the select set items in the Properties
window and edit them if appropriate.

The Find and Replace commands are not available in the Engineering Data Editor.

Find and Replace Commands (Edit Menu)

The Edit > Find or Edit > Replace commands set options for searching for and
replacing drawing items. The Find and Replace Dialog Box opens when you click
either. Depending on your command choice, you access the Find tab or the Replace
Tab.

Notes:

The Replace command does not allow a non-breaking component to be

replaced with a break component.

You can use the Replace command or the Find and Replace dialog box to
replace a multiple representation symbol providing the definition attributes for
the source (parent) and target (child) are identical. The definition attributes
are Equipment Class, Equipment SubClass, and Equipment Type.

142 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Find and Replace Dialog Box (Find Tab and Replace Tab)
Find what - Lists search criteria, and allows you to enter new search criteria or
select from a list of the five most recently used criteria. The items listed above the
dashed line in the list are used to set new search criteria by searching using the
Catalog Item, Filter, or Inconsistency options. Selecting the Catalog Item
option opens the Select Catalog Item dialog box. Selecting the Filter option
opens the Select Filter dialog box. Since you cannot replace an inconsistency, if
you select the Inconsistency option from the Find what list, the Replace with
option is not available.

Replace with - Allows you to enter a new replacement item or select a

replacement item from a list of the five most recently used items, which are listed
below the dashed line. You can define a new replacement item by selecting
Browse and picking a catalog item from the Select Catalog Item dialog box.

Search in - Defines the scope of the search. You can search the Primary or
Typical views in the active drawing or the active window. If the Active Window
option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is not available. If the Active Drawing
option is selected, the Scroll mode feature is automatically set to Zoom, and you
can select a preferred scroll mode.

Scroll mode - Defines how the active view should be changed when a drawing
item is found. If you select Zoom, the active view is zoomed to a multiple of the
range of the found drawing item. If you select Pan, the active view is shifted
without changing the view scale so that the center of the drawing item is in the
center of the view. If Scroll Mode feature is turned off, then the active view is left
unchanged.

Direction - Specifies the direction of the search. Because drawing objects are
stored linearly in the database, using either Next or Previous moves forward or
backward through the document.

Find - Initiates a search for a single item that is part of the specified search scope.
Each time you click Find, the software searches for and highlights the next
drawing item that matches the defined search criteria in the defined direction.
Each time an item is found that matches the Find what criteria, the active view is
changed based on the Scroll mode setting.

Find All - Initiates a search for all items matching the search criteria and adds
them to the select set. The active view is updated based on the Scroll mode
setting.

Replace - Replaces the item selected when you clicked Find. The Replace button
is available only when the item found can be replaced by the item defined in the
Replace with box. Each time you click Replace, the located item is replaced, and
the Find command continues based on the Direction setting. Based on the Scroll
mode setting, the active view is updated as each drawing item is found.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 143

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Replace All - Replaces all items that match the Find what criteria with the item
defined in the Replace with box without prompting you. After all of the
replacements are completed, the software reports the number of matches found
and the number of replacements that were made. The active view is also updated
depending on the Scroll mode setting.

Mirror Command
The Edit > Mirror command reflects one or more selected items about a line or axis
that you define. You can mirror without copying, or mirror and copy by using the
icon on the mirror toolbar.

To mirror an item using a defined mirror axis, click Mirror on the main toolbar. The
software reflects one or more selected items about that axis. You can mirror the item
itself, or you can make a copy of the item in the mirrored position.

Mirror an Item About a Mirror Axis That You Define

1. Select one or more items.

2. Select Edit > Mirror or from the main toolbar, click Mirror.

3. Define one end of the mirror axis by clicking in an appropriate empty portion of
the drawing or by clicking a key point. The software displays the mirror axis and
the mirrored items dynamically (that is, as you move your pointer).

4. Position the pointer so that the mirrored items appear where you want them, and
then click.

Notes:

If you want to copy the mirrored items, hold Ctrl when you click to place
your items.

Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the
Position Angle box on the Mirror ribbon.

Mirror Ribbon
The Mirror Ribbon appears on the main
toolbar when the Mirror command is active, and allows you to either specify
mirroring options or to observe mirroring options.

Copy - Copies the item or items when you mirror them.

144 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Position Angle - Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle
measurement is the point that you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis. Setting
the position angle to zero extends the axis horizontally to the right of the screen, 90
extends the axis vertically to the top, 180 extends the axis horizontally to the left, and
270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.

Rotate Command
The Edit > Rotate command rotates one or more items a precise distance or angle
about a specified point.

To rotate and item, select the item and then click Rotate. To define the rotation axis,
you must specify two points by clicking in the drawing.

First Click - Defines the rotation point.

Second Click - Defines the rotation handle.

The software then dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. If you want
to define a precise location for the rotation, you can enter values in the Rotate ribbon.
You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to control the increments
of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is displayed in 30
degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the rotation is fully
dynamic, that is, it can take on any value. The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon
displays the angle of change between the old and new position. Angles are always
displayed as a positive value.

Third Click - Completes the rotation of the item.

Rotate an Item About an Axis You Define

1. Select one or more items.

2. Select Edit > Rotate or on the main toolbar, click Rotate.

3. Click at the center of rotation.

4. Then, click to define the other end of the rotation axis.

Note:

The software dynamically displays the rotation axis and items being
rotated. The location and position of the rotation axis defines the
rotation from point.

5. Rotate the items into position by dragging the rotation axis.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 145

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

6. Click to define the rotation to point.

Notes:

To rotate by arbitrary increments, type a value in the Step Angle box

on the Rotate ribbon.

In order to copy the rotated items into the new position, you can hold
Ctrl while you click to define the ‗to point‘.

Rotate Ribbon
The Rotate Ribbon appears when the Rotate command is active, and allows you to
either observe rotation options as you rotate an item or specify rotation options.

Copy - Creates a copy of the item that you are rotating.

Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the center of
rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you rotate the item, the
position angle (C) changes to become the angle between the horizontal axis and the
point to which you rotate. The position angle is always a positive value measured
counter-clockwise from the axis.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle between
the point from which you rotate and the point to which you rotate. In the following
picture, the center of rotation (A) shows the point (B) from which you rotate the item.

The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new positions of the
rotated item. The value is always positive.

146 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the
increments, in degrees, that an item rotates on a rotation axis. You can enter
increments in the Step Angle box. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation
is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the
rotation is fully dynamic.

Undo Command
The Edit > Undo command allows you to reject the last action that you completed.

Up to ten operations are saved in the undo list, and you can undo them by repeated
use of the Undo command. The undo list is cleared if you perform any of the
following actions:

Change the properties of the Drawing view on the View Properties dialog
box

Turn the display of inconsistency indicators off or on by clicking View >

Show Inconsistencies

Click File > Save

Open a different drawing or toggle to another open drawing

Open a new Drawing view or new Engineering Data Editor (EDE)

Using commands in the EDE or on the Connector shortcut menu, move a

connector to another drawing stockpile

Changing or viewing the claim status of drawing objects

An undoable action is defined in several ways. Running a command is usually an

action. Modifying item properties is an action, and the action ends when another item
is selected. This definition of an action holds true for select sets, too, and for multiple
items selected in the EDE. That is, modifying the properties of a select set is one
action in and of itself, not one action for each member of the set.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 147

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

The Undo command does not reverse view manipulations; however, the View >
Previous command is still available for that purpose.

Undo Your Last Action

1. Click Undo.

Notes:

Pressing Ctrl + Z also undoes your last action.

The Undo command stores up to 10 actions making this command

available repeatedly.

If the Undo button is not available, then the undo list has been cleared,
and you can no longer undo your last action.

Deleting Items
You can delete items from a drawing by selecting them and clicking Cut on the main
toolbar or on the right click menu. Clicking Cut places the selected item on the
Clipboard. This action allows you to paste the item in the same location in the
drawing and then move it to another location as appropriate.

You can also delete the item by selecting it and pressing the Delete key on the
keyboard, the Delete button on the toolbar or by selecting Delete From Model or
Delete to Stockpile from the right click menu.

Items deleted to the Stockpile

The properties of an item affect what happens when you cut or delete it. If the item
has a TagReqdFlag property of True, which you set in Catalog Manager, and it is
included in the StockpileItems group, which you set in Options Manager, cutting or
deleting the item from the drawing places the item in the Stockpile UNLESS you use
the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the item when the Delete key default
behavior in Options Manager is set to ―Delete from Model‖. The data associated with
the item remains in the database.

Items deleted from the Model

If the TagReqdFlag property is False or the item type is not included in the
StockpileItems group or if you use the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the item
when the Delete key default behavior in Options Manager is set to ―Delete from

148 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Model‖, the item is removed from the database as well as the drawing when you cut
or delete it.

Notes:

You can press Delete on the keyboard to remove an item or a select set from
the drawing. First, select the item or group of items in the drawing. Then you
must point to the Drawing view before you press Delete. The software does
not delete the item or group of items if the pointer is located anywhere outside
the Drawing view.

You can delete an item by selecting and right-clicking it. On the shortcut
menu click Delete. If you select Delete from Model, the selected item is not
only deleted from the drawing but also from the database. In other words, it is
not placed in the Stockpile, regardless of its properties.

Deleted stockpile items automatically go into the Stockpile unless the Delete
key on the keyboard is used to delete the item and the Delete key default
behavior in Options Manager is set to ―Delete from Model‖. You can move an
item into the stockpile of a specific drawing.

Delete an Item from a Drawing

1. Right-click the item that you want to remove.

2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model or Delete to Stockpile (Plant or
Drawing).

OR

1. Select the item that you want to remove.

2. Click the Delete toolbar button. This will use the Default Delete Key Behavior
set in Options Manager > Settings.

Delete from Model

1. In the Drawing view, right-click the item that you want to delete in order to
display the shortcut menu.

2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete from Model to delete the item from the
drawing and from the plant model. That is, the item is not placed in the stockpile,
and when you save the drawing, no data associated with the item remains in the
database.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 149

Modifying and Moving Placed Items

Notes:

You can delete a select set from the model by choosing the items and then
right-clicking on any member of the set to display the shortcut menu.

You can also delete an item from the model when it is already in a
stockpile. Select the item in the Engineering Data Editor, and click the
Delete Stockpile Item command on the Stockpile menu of the Engineering
Data Editor.

Deleting Stockpile Items

Most items in the stockpile do not have any relationships and can be deleted.

Plant item groups, for example loops, packages, and so forth, exist in the stockpile
and have relationships to member items on a drawing or in a stockpile. If the plant
item group is deleted, the software will show a message that the plant item group is
being referenced and ask for confirmation to delete. If you confirm the delete, the
plant item group will be deleted but the drawing items will not be deleted. The
reference to the plant item group (such as the Package Item Tag, Loop Tag, etc) will
be removed from that item

When an OPC is in the stockpile, it maintains its relationship to the partner OPC.
OPCs can be deleted from the stockpile only if both OPCs in a pair are in the
stockpile and are deleted at the same time.

Default Delete Key Behavior

Delete key default behavior is set in Options Manager and specifies the default
behavior when you select drawing items and press the Delete key or click Delete on
the toolbar. The available options are:

Delete from model— Deletes the item from the database as well as from the
drawing.

Delete to plant stockpile— Deletes the item from the drawing and sends it to the
plant stockpile.

Delete to drawing stockpile— Deletes the item from the drawing and sends it to the
drawing stockpile.

Note:

The last two options only take effect for item types that appear beside the
StockpileItems property provided that the TagReqdFlag property is True for
the item.

150 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Database Properties

Working with Database Properties

The Properties window display is a two-column table that provides the common
properties of the current selection in the active Design window. The active items
always determine the content of the Properties window. You can only have one
Properties window open. If only one component is selected, or all components are of
the same type, all the properties of that type of component appear. If your select set
contains components of different types, then only the common properties appear. If
the selected items have different values for their common properties, the value box is
blank.

You can modify the values for properties in the Properties window. You can display
and edit relationships that involve components, component types, or assemblies.

At the top of the Properties window is the Selected Items list, which itemizes all of
the selected objects individually and as a select set. You can display item properties
by locating the appropriate item in the Selected Items list, as well as by selecting an
item in the Design window. If more than one item is selected in the Design window,
then the Selected Items list contains the choice Select Set as well as individual items
in the set.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 151

Working with Database Properties

You can use the Copy Bulk Properties and Paste Bulk Properties buttons to copy
properties from one item to another. This action can be particularly useful when
correcting inconsistencies, for instance, or when you must apply changes to more than
one item.

Notes:

The software includes a default set of bulk properties, but you can change
those properties specified as bulk in the Usage box on the Layout tab of the
Advanced Table Properties dialog box.

When you pause your pointer over the buttons on the Properties window
toolbar, a ToolTip appears, giving the name of the button.

An item and the properties that belong to it are associated when the item is
created in Catalog Manager.

If you copy or paste values in the grid area, use Ctrl+C and Crtl+V. Do not
use the Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste, or Edit > Cut to modify property values
in this grid.

152 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Database Properties

Properties Window Toolbar

You can customize the display of the Properties window by using the following
Properties window toolbar buttons:

Alphabetic - Lists properties in alphabetical order.

Categorized - Displays properties grouped by specific categories. Categories are

defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data Dictionary Manager.

Show Brief Properties - Displays those properties that have been previously
specified as brief on the Advanced View Properties dialog box accessible from the
Engineering Data Editor.

Copy Bulk Properties - Copies the bulk properties of a selected item. The
properties are then available to paste onto other items. For more information, see
Copy Bulk Properties.

Paste Bulk Properties - Pastes copied bulk properties onto the newly selected
item or items. You must have previously selected an item or items and copied bulk
properties. For more information, see Paste Bulk Properties.

Display Null - Displays a null value in blank properties that currently contain no
value. This option helps avoid confusion between empty cells and cells containing a
zero.

Show Case Data - Displays a list of case conditions, for example, temperatures,
pressures, and so forth. Case data includes both process cases and control cases,
which are displayed for equipment, pipe runs or instruments, according to relevance.
To see the case data that appears for corresponding items, look in Data Dictionary
Manager.

Show Select Set - When using a fence to select a set of items, displays the
common properties of the selected items. This option improves productivity by
allowing the user to change common properties immediately rather than having to
first choose ―Select Set‖ from the drop down list.

Show Single Item - When using a fence to select a set of items, displays the
properties of one item only. If you select multiple items by holding down the Ctrl
key, the software displays the select set properties rather than the properties for the
single item.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 153

Working with Database Properties

Data Types of Properties

The data types of a property determine how you will enter data for and manipulate
that property‘s value. The following is a list of data types that exist in SmartPlant
P&ID.

String – String data types allow you to simply type in the text value that you want to
assign to a property. For example, you may type in a Description or a Name for an
item.

Select Listed – In SmartPlant P&ID, some properties are restricted to preset values.
These values for SmartPlant P&ID properties are called select-listed values; they
reside in a select list. Select entries are the individual members of a select list. Select
lists and their select entries are defined in SmartPlant Data Dictionary Manager

Some examples are Nominal Diameter, MOC Class (material of construction class)
and Cleaning requirements.

Formatted (or unit of measure) – Formatted properties have a default unit of

measure that will be used whenever you enter a value for them. For example, the
default format for temperature in an English setting project is Fahrenheit. If you enter
100 for Insulation Temperature in the Properties Window, it will automatically assign
100 F. However, if you wish to enter data in a different unit of measure, you must
first choose a format from the predefined list of units of measure and then enter the
numeric value.

Notes:

For formatted properties, such as estimated length or maximum operating

temperature, you can enter a value without a format. Use a single quote, ', at
the beginning of your entry. In this way, you can enter free text into a
formatted property and no units of measurement are assigned.

The fluid code list displays only codes applicable to the type of Fluid System
that is defined. To redisplay a complete list of available fluid code values,
delete the property for the fluid system, and then the complete list of fluid
code values appears.

154 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Database Properties

Hyperlink Documents or URLs

You may hyperlink documents or URLs to items by clicking on the Calculation
button in the Description field of an item and entering data.

The entry needs to be of the form of:

file://servername/sharename/directory/document.extension
OR
a URL such as http://www.intergraph.com

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 155

Labeling

Labeling
The Properties window is your main tool to add or edit text content that appears in a
label. By adding or editing text, you are entering data into the database. Whenever
you select a label, the corresponding label properties for its labeled item appear in the
Properties window. When you select the item itself, the same properties appear in
the long list of properties. Since only the label properties appear when the label is
selected, you have an easier method to find to the label properties.

A label always reflects the current property values of the item that it labels. Labels
that populate a property at placement are called driving labels. In other words, the
predefined property value in the label overwrites the current property value on the
item that it labels. Labels that do not overwrite the property at placement are called
driven labels. Labels are defined as driven or driving in Catalog Manager.

Placing Labels
You can place a label in a few basic steps. First, you select the label that you want
from Catalog Explorer and then identify the item in the drawing that you want to
label.

Labels can have two-point placement or one-point placement. You use one-point
placement when a single point in the drawing identifies both the item to label and the
location of the label. You use two-point placement when you need one click to
identify the item to label and a second click to indicate a different location for the
label.

Some labels have no symbology associated with them; that is, they contain text only
(for example, the Short Description label for Equipment). If you place such a label,
but the properties that normally appear have not been entered yet, you have an empty
label. Since there is no symbology associated with this type of label, it would be
essentially invisible on the drawing. However, empty labels display a question mark
so that you can find them more easily and not unnecessarily repeat work.

You can add a leader line to a label by right-clicking on the label and choosing
Leader line display. If you place a leader line with the label, the first click also
identifies the end of the leader.

Labels can be moved by selecting the label and dragging the black square at the
center of the label. Drag the label to the location that you want it to occupy in the
drawing.

You set the placement type of a label at its creation in Catalog Manager. Afterwards,
you cannot change the placement type in the design software.

156 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Labeling

Using the Types of Labels

The type of label that you place determines the workflow that you follow. You define
the label type when you create a label in Catalog Manager. When you place a label,
the rules defined in Rule Manager are applied. There are four types of labels: Title
Block, Flow Arrow, Component, and Break.

Title Block
The title block label is unique among label types because you do not have to identify
the item to receive the label. The title block usually displays general information
about a drawing such as the Title, Drawing Number, Revision info, etc. After you
select the label in the Catalog Explorer, you can click or drag it to the location in the
drawing where you want the label to reside.

Utilize Catalog Manager, to modify the Title Block Label to exclude or include
additional properties. The different template files, which are utilized during the
creation of a new Drawing, contain different Title Blocks. To place a Title Block
Label within the Title Block either embed the Title Block Label within the Template
or place the Title Block Label once the drawing is opened. The Title Block Label is
embedded within a few of the delivered Templates such as the Drawing Title*.sym.

There are two methods of editing values for the properties utilized in a Title Block
Label.

1. Once the Title Block Label is placed, select the label and enter/modify values
through the Property Window

2. From Drawing Manager, select the Drawing and select Edit > Properties
from the menu.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 157

Labeling

Flow Arrow
You place flow arrows in process piping lines. When you place the label, the arrow
orients itself with the flow in the pipe run if you have already defined flow direction.
If you have not specified a flow direction, then the direction you place the flow arrow
defines it for you (that is, a flow arrow is a driving label).

As you drag the label from the list view of Catalog Explorer, pipe runs in the
Drawing view are highlighted when you pause over them. Click a highlighted pipe
run to place the label. Flow arrows require only one click to place them.

After placing the label, you can change the flow direction of the pipe run in the
Properties window, and the flow arrow reorients itself accordingly. You cannot
change label properties that appear in the Properties window for a flow arrow.

Component
This type of label identifies physical commodities in the model. A typical example is
an Equipment ID label. Properties assigned to the label affect its behavior.

Component labels have a unique property: Label Behavior. The values are defined in
a select list in Data Dictionary Manager and are chosen in Catalog Manager when you
create a label. The default value is Follow. Values for this property can include the
following:

Follow (no rotate) - The label does move but does not rotate, corresponding
to changes to the labeled item.

Follow - The label does move and rotate, corresponding to changes to the
labeled item.

Fixed - The label does not move if you move the labeled item.

This illustration shows component labels that you use to label vessels, nozzles, and
piping components. It also depicts both fixed and rotated orientations of labels.

158 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Labeling

Break
A break label, or property break label, graphically shows that a change occurs or can
occur in a property at some point in the process. This label indicates to the software
that an inconsistency for that property is acceptable. As a result, the software does not
issue a warning, or an existing inconsistency resolves itself when you place the break.

The consistency criteria specified in Rule Manager defines the general behavior of the
properties. Break labels provide a way to define exceptions to the general rules. A
break label provides a visible and printable symbol that signifies the end of one
property value condition and the beginning of a new condition along a pipe. A
changed property value is never propagated across a break label for that property. A
break label also suppresses consistency checking for the property it breaks.

A break label can be created for any property or collection of properties of a pipe run.
A break label is created in the Catalog Manager just like any other label, except that
the Label Type property is set to Attribute Break. A SmartText field must be created
for each property that is to be broken. In many cases the graphical shape of the label
indicates which properties are broken. In these cases the Visible flag on the
SmartText is set to False so that the text is not visible. It is also normal to turn the
leader line on within the Catalog Manager so that it is automatically displayed at
placement time. All of the symbols under Piping\Segment Breaks in the delivered
catalog are break labels and are two point placement.

A break label can only be placed at the endpoint of a graphical pipe line where it
connects to a component or a branch point. Furthermore, a break label can only be
placed at a point where the specified properties are listed in the consistency criteria
for the applicable rules. The break label stays attached to the point it was placed on
and cannot be dragged away from it. Break labels do not set properties but note that a
value change is acceptable for the property at the indicated point. Text included in the
label reflects the property at that point. You can associate multiple property breaks
with one point on the drawing.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 159

Labeling

Notes:

You can turn on or off the property for display leader line after you place the
label. To display a leader line for the label, right-click the label, and then click
Leader line display on the shortcut menu.

Break labels can be removed using the Delete command. If the break label is
removed, the break is also removed. However, if there is another break label
at the same point, the break is not removed.

Display Sets can be utilized to turn off the display of Break labels.

Label Alignment
After two or more labels are selected, a user may use the label alignment toolbar
buttons to arrange the labels with respect to the others in the group or with respect to
the labeled item. The alignment buttons use the range of the labels excluding the
leader lines. So, if the label has only a text box then the ranges of the label and text
box are the same; however, if the label has a text box surrounded by a rectangle, the
ranges of the label will be different than only the text box (in this case the entire
range of the label is used).

Alignment Choices
Align Left – aligns the labels so that the left-most line of the range is aligned

Align Right – aligns the labels so that the right-most line of the range is aligned

Align Center about Vertical – calculates the center points of each label‘s range in
the vertical direction and places them in a line

Align Center about Horizontal – calculates the center points of each label‘s range in
the horizontal direction and places them in a line

Align Top - aligns labels so that the top of the ranges are in line

Align Bottom – aligns labels so that the bottom of the ranges are in line

160 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Filters

Using Filters
You can use filters in many ways throughout the software and its stand-alone
applications and utilities.

You can use filters in a display set used in the drawing view or in the Engineering
Data Editor. For example, you can create a display set and use a filter to show all
pumps in the drawing view. You can then select all the pumps and edit their
properties one-by-one or as a select set in the Properties window. That same filter
can be applied to the Engineering Data Editor in a layout or with an asking filter to
display a list of pumps and their properties in a tabular format, where you can also
edit the properties of the pumps.

You can use filters when you create report templates to display particular items on a
report. You can use filters in Rule Manager to define how items interact within a
view. You can associate filters with the source or target properties in rules. And you
can use filters to find and replace items.

You can create filters to control the display of hierarchy items in Drawing Manager.
These filters are not saved to any folder in Filter Manager, but the methods of
creating these filters are the same as those for creating filters saved in Filter Manager.

Filters can help you show different views of the same drawing and can make your
workflow more efficient. For example, you can use a filter to display an "operational"
drawing, or an "under construction" drawing. You can show all items added after a
certain date or after a certain revision number. You can also use filters if you want to
delete items of a certain type.

Select Filter Dialog Box

When you work in an application and need to work with filters, you will access the
Select Filter Dialog Box shown in the image below. This is very similar to the Filter
Manager application.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 161

Using Filters

The Tree view in the main window shows the organizational structure of the filters.
Filters appear either singly or grouped into compound filters. Folders contain all
filters and compound filters. You can create folders and nest folders. Nesting folders
occurs when one folder contains another folder, which in turn contains filters and
possibly still other folders.

All users working on a specific plant can access plant filters, which are stored in the
Plant Folders directory. For instance, Rule Manager uses filters in the plant filters
grouping. The My Folders header contains personal filters. These filters appear only
when the owner is the current user. You can create new filters and compound filters
in the My Folders header.

The Display Filters folder is a good place to organize the filters that you frequently
use to control the display of the various views in the design software. It is a good idea
to create new filters, copy filters, or add shortcuts to filters in this folder rather than
moving original filters from, for instance, the Filters for Rules folder.

You can cut, copy, paste, and rename folders and filters. Double-clicking a filter in
the Tree view displays the Filter Properties dialog box.

Managing Filters
The Select Filter dialog box (like Filter Manager) allows you to create and manage
filters. Filters are used extensively throughout the SmartPlant engineering suite.

Two main types of filters exist: simple and compound. You can nest one or more
simple filters in compound filters to build a more complex collection of items. For
example, if you have one filter that shows the secondary piping in the drawing, and
another filter that shows the primary piping, you can combine these filters to show all

162 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Filters

of the piping without the hose. You can even nest compound filters for more
complexity.

Filters can apply to an entire plant or to an individual user. Your plant administrator
can create, edit, or delete the filters for the entire plant. The individual user can only
view, select, and apply plant filters. However, you can create personal filters, saved
on your local computer, which you can edit or delete.

Simple Filters
A simple filter is a filter that only uses one criteria specification (either And or Or).
There may be two or more properties defined in the filter, but all are using the same
criteria.

Filter Properties Dialog Box

The Filter Properties Dialog Box specifies properties of a filter, including the name,
description, and the other properties for which you want to filter. The dialog box will
look different, depending upon whether you have selected a simple filter or
compound filter. Each item type owns a set of properties. Examples of item types are
Equipment, Instrument, and Pipe Run, and examples of properties for these item
types are Equipment Type, Instr.Loop Part Number, and Estimated Length,
respectively.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 163

Using Filters

Name - Specifies the filter name. The name can be any combination of characters and
has no length limit. Filter names within a plant must be unique. This name appears as
the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.

Description - Allows you to specify a phrase or sentence about the filter. The
description can be any combination of characters and has no length limit. The
description appears as a ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter
Manager interface.

Filter for - Contains the top-level items from the data dictionary. This area allows
you to specify available properties in the Definition grid.

Definition - Displays all defined criteria associated with a filter. To add to or modify
the definition list, you must select a line in the list and then define or edit the property
in the Edit group.

Match all - Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass
through the filter.

Match any - Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering
criteria pass through the filter. Match any is the default matching method.

Add - Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables
the options in the Edit group so you can edit the new entry.

Delete - Removes the selected criterions from the definition list. This button is
available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.

Edit - Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.

Property - Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Examples
of properties include Equipment Type, Instr.Loop Part Number, and
Estimated Length. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a
property, an operator, and a value.

Operator - Specifies the relationship between the property and the specified
value. Relationships include, for example, greater than (>), equal to (=), not
equal to (<>), and so forth.

Value - Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property
column. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box, you
must type a value, which can be free text, or choose null. You can type a
percent sign (%) as a wildcard character to find multiple characters, or type a
question mark (?) as a wildcard character for a single character. Do not use an
asterisk (*) in the Value box.

164 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Filters

Compound Filters
A compound filter is a filter comprised of two or more simple filters. A compound
filter combines Match All and Match Any criteria (And and Or).

Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box

The Compound Filter Properties Dialog Box specifies properties of a compound
filter, including the name, description, and whether to match all or any of the simple
filter criteria. A compound filter consists of more than one simple filter. Simple filters
are added to the compound filter either by dragging the simple filter to the compound
filter folder or by creating new simple filters under the compound filter in the filter
hierarchy. Compound filters apply only to homogeneous item types.

Name - Specifies the filter name. The name can be any combination of characters and
has no length limit. Filter names within a plant must be unique. This name appears as
the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.

Description - Specifies a phrase or sentence about the filter. The description can be
any combination of characters and has no length limit. The description appears as a
ToolTip when you point to the filter name on the Filter Manager interface.

Filter Method - Allows you to decide whether items must meet all or only one
criterion to pass through the filter.

Match all - Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass
through the filter.

Match any - (Default) Specifies that items matching any one or more of the
filtering criteria pass through the filter.

Notes:

All of the filters that make up the new compound filter need to be of the same
item type, which appears in the Filter for list on the Filter Properties dialog
box. For example, all of the simple filters making up a compound filter can be

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 165

Using Filters

of type Equipment: Mechanical. You cannot mix Equipment: Mechanical

with Equipment: Heat Transfer or any other item type.

Once one simple filter has been assigned to a compound filter, all simple
filters created under that compound filter will have the same value in the
Filter for field as the first. This is because all of the simple filters under one
compound filter must be of the same item type.

When you point to the name of a compound filter in the tree view in Filter
Manager or the Select Filter dialog box, the filter description displays as a
ToolTip.

If you have the Select Filter dialog box open, do not open Filter Manager and
make changes to filters in that utility also.

166 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working With Assemblies

Working With Assemblies

An assembly is a group of items that you can place in a drawing at one time.
Assemblies can save time because you do not have to keep creating commonly-
occurring groups of items. Instead of copying and pasting each individual item into a
drawing at several locations, you can place the group of items: the assembly. An
example of an assembly is a control valve with vents on both sides, an instrument
loop that controls the valve, and a piping bypass around the valve.

You can create an assembly by selecting several items in a drawing and saving as an
assembly. The file extension for an assembly is .pid, which is the same file extension
as a drawing. If you want to retrieve the assembly from the Catalog Explorer tree
view, you must save the assembly where the other symbols are located. The Save As
Assembly command prompts you to save the assembly in the correct directory, which
is specified in Options Manager.

Placing assemblies is like placing any other item from Catalog Explorer into a
drawing. When you want to place an assembly into a drawing, you select the
assembly from Catalog Explorer and click a location in the drawing. Or, you can
drag the assembly into the drawing. The information in each label remains intact
when you place the assembly. After you have placed an assembly, the items in the
assembly are treated as separate items. You can delete just one item without concern
that the software deletes the entire assembly.

Assemblies cannot be placed inline. You must place the assembly first and then route
piping to it, if required.

Notes:

Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. However, the
file structure and symbols must be identical. If you try to place an assembly
into a plant that uses a different file structure, you get an error message that
the software cannot find your reference files. The assembly placement quits.
Move the symbols that cannot be found to the location indicated in the error
message.

When creating or placing assemblies, a log file is created for each action.
The log files are placed in the Temp folder and are named
<AssemblyName>_CreAsm.log and <AssemblyName>_PlaAsm.log.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 167

Working With Assemblies

Create an Assembly
1. Select several components in the drawing.

Notes:

You can select more than one item at once by dragging to fence the
objects.

To remove an item from the selection, click it while pressing the Ctrl key.

2. Click File > Save As Assembly on the main menu bar.

3. Specify the origin of the assembly.

Important

A red target appears at the end of your pointer. Use this to specify the origin of
the assembly which is utilized during placement of the assembly.

Note:

You can only use a standalone symbol as the origin of an assembly. For
example, you cannot use labels, pipe runs, signal runs, or child items;
however, you can use unattached ends of pipe runs.

4. Define a File Name and Folder location for the Assembly on the Save As
Assembly dialog box.

5. Select Save

6. You will be notified when the assembly has been created.

7. Reference the log file in your ~\temp folder when assembly creation is complete.

(<AssemblyName>_CreAsm.log)

Notes:

Any graphics that have been band-aided should be deleted and replaced
prior to using this command.

168 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working With Assemblies

The file extension for assemblies is .pid.

You can save an assembly in any directory that you want, but the default
assembly path is specified in Options Manager. If you use the default
folder, then you can retrieve the assembly from Catalog Explorer. In
order to save assemblies, you must have write permissions to the folder
defined in Options Manager which is used for saving the assembly.

Assemblies can be created in one plant and used in another. However, the
symbol file structure (paths) and symbols must be identical. If you try to
place an assembly into a plant that uses a different symbol file structure,
you get an error message that the software cannot find your reference files.
The assembly placement quits. Move the symbols that cannot be found to
the location indicated in the error message.

Place an Assembly
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, click the assembly that you want to place.

2. Use the red target that appears at the end of your pointer to position the assembly
appropriately.

Notes:

The red target is the origin of the assembly. Some assembly members also
appear during placement to aid you.

Press Esc to quit placement mode, or you can escape placement mode by
right-clicking.

3. Connect the pipe runs and instruments on either side of the assembly.

Notes:

You cannot place an assembly into a line that is already routed.

Modify or delete individual components in the assembly as necessary.

4. You will be notified when the assembly has been placed.

5. Reference the log file in your ~\temp folder when assembly placement is
complete (<AssemblyName>_PlaAsm.log).

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 169

Working With Assemblies

Assembly Reference Data

In the delivered reference data, under Assemblies, there are several assemblies for
equipment, instrumentation and piping.

Assemblies: This category contains 3 additional categories: Equipment,

Instrumentation and Piping.

Equipment: This category contains equipment assemblies.

Instrumentation: This category contains instrumentation assemblies

Piping: This category contains piping assemblies.

170 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Typicals

Working with Typicals

The term ―Typicals‖ in P&ID design indicates to the viewer of the drawing that what
is shown is not the complete story. A typical is a user defined, single graphical
representation of repeated sets of objects and their relationships. The typical may be
visually represented as a single item or any combination of items up to and including
a complete P&ID. Typicals may include any objects or symbols depicted in the P&ID
symbol catalog, including off-page connectors.

Important

Although the typicals may be seen when either the Typical or Both Views are
active, there is no graphical implication that a typical exists when only the
Primary View is active. The user should add text to indicate that a typical is
present.

On the drawing, a typical marks the position of where similar groups of objects
should appear but have been hidden from view to reduce congestion in the model and
to make the reading of the drawing clearer. For example, on a drawing, a typical that
contains a utility pipe, a reducer, a valve, and a utility OPC, informs the viewer that at
this position on the drawing there is more than one group of objects containing these
items.

Single representation of a typical utility station

In SmartPlant P&ID, the original set of objects from which the typicals are created
resides in the primary view and all typicals reside and display in the typical view of
the drawing. In order to view all typicals and their attributes, the user must switch
from the primary to the typical view. Though the typical items reside in a different
view, all relationships with the objects in the primary view are maintained once they
are established. Typicals can be placed repeatedly any number of times.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 171

Working with Typicals

Three typical representations of the utility station in the typical view of the drawing

Note:

Typical does not mean ‗identical‘. The extent to which a typical record will
deviate from the primary objects representation is a matter of company
practice and plant rules.

New item tags will be generated for the typical objects according to the plant rules.
Property differences beyond the item tags are also possible. Item properties in the
typical view are editable just as they are in the primary view. Once the typicals have
been created, a change to any of the typical representations will be propagated to the
other typicals ONLY if specified by the plant rules and system editing. In the
example of the utility station above, if the diameter of the utility pipe section on the
left is changed from 1 ½ to 2 in the primary view, the pipe sections in the 3 typicals
in the typical view will not be changed automatically. The user must change them
manually. However, if a cleaning requirement is assigned to the vertical pipe it will
propagate to all the connected typicals due to the rules set up for system editing.

Note:

Items which are placed in the typical view have a property ‗Is_Typical‘. The
value for this property is assigned by the software and cannot be changed by
the user.

Drawing Views
SmartPlant P&ID offers 3 drawing views (Primary, Typical and Both (Primary and
Typical)) for the user to create and manipulate typical records. The user can toggle
between all 3 views by selecting one of the 3 buttons (Show Primary, Show Typical,
or Show Both) on the Typical Ribbon Bar.

172 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Typicals

The user can toggle between all 3 views by selecting one of the 3 commands (Show
Typical, Show Primary, or Show Both) items on the View Menu.

Important

The command for the currently active view is disabled on the toolbar or menu.

The disabled appearance of the toolbar button and the indicator on the
status bar show the user which view is currently
active.

When the Show Primary command is disabled on the menu, the Primary View is
active. The primary view shows all objects which reside in the primary view. The
‗Is_Typical‘ property for items in the primary view is False. Items from which
typicals are created are initially placed in the primary view.

When the Show Typical command is disabled on the menu, the Typical View is
active. The typical view shows all typicals, - objects which reside in the typical view.
The ‗Is_Typical‘ property for items in the typcial view is True. When the user creates
a typical, the software automatically switches to the typical view to allow placement.
The user can also switch to the typical view manually and place items into the typical
view directly.

When the Show Both command is disabled on the menu, both the Primary and the
Typical Views are active. Both views are a combination of the primary and typical
views. All objects in the drawing (primary and typical) are visible. This view must be
active when items in the typical view need to be connected to objects in the primary
view.

Important

You cannot create a typical while this view is active.

Typical Commands (Edit Menu)

The commands to manipulate the typicals (Move to Typical, Move to Primary, and
Create Typical) are available on the Edit Menu or the right- click menu.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 173

Working with Typicals

Move to Typical Command

The Edit > Move to Typical command moves the selected objects from the primary
view to the typical view. This command is only enabled when the primary view is
active and items have been selected.

Move to Primary Command

The Edit > Move to Primary command moves the selected objects from the typical
view to the primary view. This command is only enabled when the typical view is
active and items have been selected.

Create Typical Command

The Edit > Create Typical command creates a typical from the selected items in the
primary view and opens the typical view for placement. This command is only
enabled when the primary view is active and items have been selected.

Creating a Typical
1. Draw the objects to be included in the typical in the primary view of the drawing.
Place a vessel, 2 nozzles, connect to process pipe runs, and a level gauge as
illustrated.

174 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Typicals

2. Select the items to be included in the typical by using a fence command or by

multi-selecting items with the Ctrl keyboard button and mouse clicks.

3. Select the Create Typical command (from the File Menu or right click menu).
The software will prompt you to identify an Origin Point.

4. Select a standalone symbol as the origin of the typical record.

The software activates the Typical View and the select set of objects will be
attached to the cursor.

Note:

At this time, you can cancel the command by right mouse click or ESC
button
5. Select a location for placement and left mouse click to place the typical. The
select set will remain attached to your cursor for repeated placement.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 175

Working with Typicals

6. Select a location for placement and left mouse click to place more typicals as
needed.
7. Right click or press Esc to end typical placement. The typical view of the drawing
is active.

Connecting Typicals to objects in the Primary View

If a typical record is connected to objects in the primary view (such as the connect to
process line in the example above), these connections will not be maintained in the
typical view but must be re-established manually by the user.
1. Select Show Both from the View menu or the Typical ribbon bar to display both
the primary and the typical view.The inconsistency indicators will indicate the
places where the pipe runs are not connected.

2. Connect both lines in the typical view to the connect to process line in the primary
view.

Special Case: Nozzles

If nozzles are included in the select set but the parent item is not, the
nozzles will not be included in the typical record. The nozzles must be
placed separately, moved to the typical view, and then connected as
required. This behavior is the same as the current SmartPlant P&ID
copy/paste behavior where a nozzle cannot be copied and pasted without
having the equipment item included.

176 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Working with Typicals

In the selection above, the nozzles will be removed from the select set before
the typical record is created. A message will inform the user about the items that
have been removed.

Notes:

Objects in the primary and typical views share the same graphical
coordinates and objects related to each other will affect objects in the
other view when they are moved. For example, if the typical record
contains nozzles attached to a vessel in the primary view and the
vessel is moved, the typical nozzles will be moved with the vessel and
any pipe runs attached to the nozzles will be affected.
There will be no connection/correlation between the property values of
the typical records and the typical ‗parent‘. If a change is made to the
primary objects or any of the typical records it will be the user‘s
responsibility to make the same change to all other records.
The ‗Is_Typical‘ property is available for display in the property grid
and the Engineering Data Editor as well as for use in generating
reports and filters. The objects within the Typical Records will be
identifiable but will not be excluded from database queries or reports
unless so chosen by the user.
The Typical record will not be treated as a group for movements/other
graphical manipulations. Once a typical record has been placed, the

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 177

Working with Typicals

items that are included in it become separate items just as they do in an

assembly.
Boundary conditions (connecting typical records to primary objects)
must be managed by the user.
Auxiliary Graphics will not be included in the typical records
Using OPCs in Typicals
o OPCs may be included in the 'Typical'. When placing the typical
records in the typical view, the mate OPCs will automatically go to
the plant stockpile, regardless of the setting in the Tools > Options
> Placement dialog. The user will be responsible for moving them
to their corresponding drawing stockpiles if necessary and attach
them to the pipe runs in the mate drawings.
o OPCs placed from Catalog Explorer while the typicals view is
active will generate the mate OPC according to the user setting –
open the dialog for selecting the required stockpile or send it to the
plant stockpile automatically if the user has checked the option in
Tools -> Options -> Placement.
o OPCs carry the Is_Typical property and values can differ between
two mated OPCs.
Display Sets are applicable to the primary and typical views.
In the EDE, the active view will be changed if a single item is selected
or if all items selected in the EDE belong to the same view. If the
selected items are a mixture of typical and primary objects the active
view will remain as is. The properties displayed in the property grid
will be of all the selected items.
Pipe placed in the primary view will not be gapped by pipes in typical
view and vice versa. The Tools > AutoGap and Tools > Gap Now
commands are disabled when both views are active.
With Save As to AutoCAD/Microstation/SmartSketch, typical records
will be presented in the saved drawings on a different layer.
System Editing will propagate data from the primary objects to the
typical records according to the plant's defined rules.
Undo of typical placement will undo placement of all typicals placed
in the last operation, not just the last typical record placed, and return
the user to the primary view. Switching views is an undoable
command.

178 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Adding Design Elements

Adding Design Elements

The Design category encompasses a range of elements that may be used on a P&ID
such as Annotations (or Notes), Area Breaks, Packages, and Revision Clouds. Title
block labels are also contained in this category.

Using Annotations
Annotations are model items used to add notes, remarks, and other information to
your drawing. You can use annotations to include any type of information previously
inserted into a drawing using primitive commands. Annotations include everything
from geometric shapes to extension and dimension lines.

Because annotations are frequently parametric, often you can resize them to fit your
needs.

Placing annotations works like placing any other component in a drawing. When you
place an annotation, which has an item type of item note, on a drawing, you can then
place a label on the item note. These labels allow you to enter the remarks, notes, and
other information that you need to effectively annotate your drawings.

Notes:

You cannot annotate drawings by opening them in SmartSketch and adding

dumb graphics to the drawing. Opening and saving a .pid file in SmartSketch
can corrupt the file, making the drawing unusable.

Annotations are a way to place free remarks in a drawing. There are several
design labels of different formats available in Catalog Explorer. Most of
these labels require placing an annotation point or other design graphic on the
drawing first and then attaching a label to the graphic. The plain annotation
point is located in the Graphics folder under the Annotation node; however,
there is one item in the Labels folder with an annotation point built into it. It
is called Item Note & Label, and it looks like this:

Annotation Point Item note

It is possible to associate the Item Note & Label with a P&ID object such as
Equipment, Valve, etc. If you delete the P&ID object and the Item Note &
Label is associated to this object the Item Note & Label will also be deleted.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 179

Adding Design Elements

Place an Annotation
1. In the Catalog Explorer list view, select the annotation that you want to place
from the Graphics folder.

Note:

The Item Note and Label from the Design > Annotation > Labels folder
has a built-in Annotation Point and Label.

2. Click to place the Annotation at the appropriate place in the drawing or drag the
annotation over a drawing item, Equipment or Piping Component, to ―associate
or link‖ the Annotation to the item.

3. Press Esc to quit placement mode.

4. To add text to the Annotation, you place a label from the Design > Annotation >
Labels folder on the Annotation unless you placed an Item Note and Label
from the Design > Annotation > Labels folder which has a built-in label.

5. Assign text to the Annotation in the Note Text property box in the Properties
window.

Select Associated Item Command

The Edit > Select Associated Item command will highlight the associated item when
an Item Note and Label is associated with a drawing item, such as Equipment or
Piping Component. This command is also available from the shortcut menu when the
annotation point of the Item Note and Label is selected.

180 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Adding Design Elements

Packages and Systems

Package, Contract Package, Hydro Test Package, Test Systems, Safety Class and
Hydraulic Circuits are similar to Instrument Loops in that they are a group of one or
more items with a common set of properties. For example, you may want to have a
package to denote items that will be included in a palette. A system could be used to
denote the portions of a P&ID used for testing prior to startup. To associate items
with a Package, Contract Package, Hydro Test Package, Test Systems, Safety Class,
or Hydraulic Cicuits you will use the Pkg Item Tag property, Contract Package No,
Hydro Test Package No, Test Sys Item Tag property, Instr Safety Class Item Tag or
Hydraulic Circuit Item Tag respectively.

Place a Package
1. Right-click the package symbol in Catalog Explorer in the Design node.

2. From the shortcut menu, select either Send to Stockpile or Send to Drawing
Stockpile, whichever is appropriate.

3. In the Properties window, enter a value for the Item Tag property or enter a
value for the Item Tag in the EDE.

4. In the Drawing view, select items to be part of the package.

5. In the Properties window, choose Select Set from the Properties box.

6. In the Properties window, click in the Package Item Tag box and select the
appropriate value displayed list.

Notes:

Some catalog items do not possess the Package Item Tag property. Do not
include those items in your select set because the package item tag does
not appear in the Properties window if any member of the select set does
not possess that property.

Plant item groups, such as instrument loops, packages, safety classes, and
so forth, frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on
drawings. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has
special limitations:

 From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile - No constraints apply.

This action can occur at anytime.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 181

Adding Design Elements

 From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile - If the plant item group

contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain
items in any other drawing, this action is allowed.

 From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile - Same

constraint as above applies.

Area Breaks
An area break is a graphical fence around an area of a drawing where a package or
system may be applied.

Place an Area Break

1. Select the area break in Catalog Explorer in the Design node.

2. Place the area break shape around items in the Drawing view for which this area
break applies.

Notes:

You can place a rectangular area break by dragging the pointer in the
Drawing view, like fencing items with the Select Tool.

Or you can place a multi-sided area break by clicking at a starting point

and then clicking for each vertex of the shape.

3. Press Esc to quit placement mode.

4. Create a select set of the items that you want to include in the area break.

Note:

You can include the area break shape itself or not, but only the common
properties of each item in the select set will be displayed.

5. In the Properties window, specify the properties for the select set.

Note:

You can nest area breaks that have different values for the same property
with one restriction: one area break must completely enclose the other area
break. The value for the inside area break overrides the value for the
outside area. For example, for a group of items, you can designate a
portion as Supply By Contractor and a smaller portion as Supply By
Owner.

182 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Adding Design Elements

Hydraulic Circuits
With Hydraulic Circuits you can define many-to-many relationships between the
Hydraulic Circuit and SmartPlant P&ID drawing items; that is, multiple Hydraulic
Circuits can be associated with Pipe Runs or Vessels.

Associate Hydraulic Circuits with an Item

Important

Before selecting the pipe run for associating hydraulic circuits, open Options
Manager and make sure that Hydraulic Circuit appears among the items
included in the StockpileItems property.

1. In the Catalog Explorer tree view, select the Symbols > Design node.

2. In the lower pane, select Hydraulic Circuit, right-click, and on the shortcut
menu, click Send to Stockpile.

3. Assign a value for the hydraulic circuit's Item Tag property.

4. Select one or more items and in the Properties window, beside the Hydraulic
Circuit Item Tag property, click the ellipsis.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 183

Adding Design Elements

5. On the Select Hydraulic Circuits dialog box, from the Available circuits list,
select a hydraulic circuit that you want to associate with the item, and then click
Add.

6. Repeat the previous step for each additional hydraulic circuit that you want to
associate with the item.

7. Close the dialog box and beside the Hydraulic Circuit Item Tag property, view
the hydraulic circuits that you added.

Select Hydraulic Circuits Dialog Box

The Select Hydraulic Circuits Dialog Box allows you to select one or more
hydraulic circuits for an item of equipment, an equipment component, or a pipe run.
This dialog box opens when you select the item and click the ellipsis beside the
Hydraulic Circuit Item Tag property in the Properties window.

Available circuits – Displays the list of available hydraulic circuits that are not
selected for the item. To select one or more hydraulic circuits, highlight them in this
window one at a time and click Add.

Selected circuits – Displays the list of hydraulic circuits that have been selected. To
deselect one or more hydraulic circuits, highlight them in this window one at a time
and click Remove.

184 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Adding Design Elements

Revision Clouds
A revision cloud is a graphical cloud indicating a change in one or more items or
attributes contained within the cloud.

Place a Revision Cloud

1. Using the Catalog Explorer, select the Symbols > Design > Revision Cloud.

2. Click the starting point in the drawing for the revision cloud area.

3. In a clockwise direction, continue clicking to place vertices on the revision cloud.

4. Right-click to complete the revision cloud.

5. Set the Area Break Style property to either a Cloud - Large or Cloud - Small.

Notes:

You can change the symbology, the line width and line style, using the
Symbology option in Options Manager.

You must place a revision triangle to add the Revision number property
to the cloud.

Design Reference Data

In the delivered Design reference data, there are a wide variety of items such as area
break, revision cloud, revision triangle, drawing issue record, title block labels,
revision labels, and packages and systems.

Annotation: This category contains 2 additional categories: Graphics and Label.

Graphics: This category contains the annotation point and geometric shapes
and lines.

Label: This category contains various annotation labels.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 185

Auxiliary Graphics

Auxiliary Graphics
You can use Auxiliary Graphics to add simple graphics to your SmartPlant P&ID
drawings. When you have completed adding graphics using Auxiliary Graphics,
these graphics display in your SmartPlant P&ID drawing inside a SmartFrame. The
SmartFrame and its contents are stored in the database.

The Auxiliary Graphics Draw toolbar contains commands for working with
continuous lines and arcs, tangent arcs, curves, free form drawing, circles, rectangles,
fillets, text and so forth. The Draw toolbar displays down the left side of the drawing
sheet.

You can customize the Auxiliary Graphics Draw toolbar using Tools > Customize.
The available commands display with (Auxiliary) following the command name. The
Toolbar choices include: Draw (Auxiliary), Features (Auxiliary), Trim (Auxiliary),
Extend (Auxiliary), Group (Auxiliary), Manipulation (Auxiliary), Priority
(Auxiliary), Edit (Auxiliary), Relations (Auxiliary), and Text (Auxiliary).
Notes:

Any SmartPlant P&ID command not available during the Auxiliary Graphics
session is disabled.

If you add auxiliary graphics to a SmartPlant P&ID object and then move the
object in the drawing, the auxiliary graphics will not move with the object.
You must enter the auxiliary graphics session where the graphics were added
and reposition the graphics separately.

Any customizations made to the Draw toolbar are not saved when you close
the Auxiliary Graphics session.

The Undo buffer is cleared each time you enter an Auxiliary Graphics session.
The SmartPlant P&ID Undo buffer is also cleared at this time.

Auxiliary Graphics are turned on and off with Notes. By clicking

View>Properties>Notes, the display of notes is turned on or off.

Drawing and Editing in Auxiliary Graphics Mode

The drawing, editing and other commands match those used for SmartSketch.
However, only basic Rapid Application Development (RAD) commands are
included. Commands exclusive to SmartSketch are not included.

186 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Auxiliary Graphics

Inserting Auxiliary Graphics

Click Edit > Insert > Auxiliary Graphics. A drawing sheet displaying your
SmartPlant P&ID drawing displays. You can then create graphics using the displayed
Draw toolbar. Existing objects in your current SmartPlant P&ID drawing cannot be
selected or edited but do display for viewing purposes.

Closing Auxiliary Graphics

Click File > Close Auxiliary Graphics to exit Auxiliary Graphics and return to your
SmartPlant P&ID drawing.

Editing Auxiliary Graphics

To edit the graphics again, double-click on the SmartFrame or right-click and select
Edit.

Notes:

The View > Properties > Display “Prevent selection of inserted objects”
option must not be checked in order for you to be able to select the
SmartFrame.

If you select Edit > Insert > Auxiliary Graphics again, you will enter into a
new Auxiliary Graphics session. You will be able to create new graphics but
you will not be able to edit the graphics you created in the previous session.

Toolbars
When you enter Auxiliary Graphics mode, the Draw toolbar is displayed as the
default toolbar. Two more toolbars, Change and Relationship, are also available, but
are initially hidden. They can be activated from the Toolbars dialog.

Draw Toolbar

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 187

Auxiliary Graphics

The Draw Toolbar contains Select Tool, Line/Arc Continuous, Tangent Arc, Curve,
Circle by Center Point, Rectangle, Point, Text Box, Fillet, Trim, Extend to Next, Fill
and Revision Cloud.

Note:

Revision Clouds are available for placement in Auxiliary Graphics mode.

You can place these by selecting the Revision Cloud command on the Draw
toolbar while in Auxiliary Graphics mode.

Change Toolbar

The Change Toolbar contains Move/Copy, Offset, Rotate, Mirror, Scale, Bring To
Front, Send To Back, Pull Up, and Push Down, Group, Ungroup.

Relationship Toolbar

The Relationship Toolbar contains Connect, Horizontal/Vertical, Parallel,

Perpendicular, Tangent, Colinear, Concentric, Symmetric, Equal, Lock, Relationship
Handles, Alignment Indicator.

Customizing Toolbars
You can customize the Auxiliary Graphics Draw toolbar using Tools > Customize.
The available commands display with (Auxiliary) following the command name. The
Toolbar choices include the following:

Draw: includes the drawing commands: Line/Arc Continuous, Tangent Arc, Arc By
3 Points, Arc By Center Point, Circle By Center Point, Circle by 3 Points, Tangent
Circle, Ellipse By Center Point, Ellipse by 3 Points, Rectangle, Curve, Point,
FreeSketch, and FreeForm.

Features: contains the commands Fillet and Chamfer.

Trim: contains the commands Trim and Trim Corner.

Extend: contains the Extend to Next command.

188 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Auxiliary Graphics

Group: contains the commands Group, Ungroup, Rectangular Pattern, and Circular
Pattern.

Manipulation: contains the commands Offset and Scale.

Priority: contains the commands Bring To Front, Send To Back, Pull Up, and Push
Down.

Edit: contains the commands Paste, Redo, Delete, Undo List, Redo List, and Edit
Properties.

Text: contains commands Text Box, Fill, and Character Map.

SmartSketch Settings Command

The Tools > SmartSketch Settings command is activated while in Auxiliary
Graphics mode. This command displays the SmartSketch Setting dialog box which
controls which glyphs are shown while the user is drawing. It also controls how close
the cursor must be to an element for the glyphs to appear. During normal SmartPlant
P&ID mode, the option will be disabled, or not selectable.

Relationships Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

The Relationships tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the
software as you draw. You can set the relationships you want to recognize, and clear
the relationships you do not want to recognize. If you clear all relationships, the
software will not show relationship handles. The relationship handle is the graphic
used to represent a geometric relationship between elements, key points, and
dimensions, or between key points and elements. The relationship handle shows that
the designated relationship is being maintained.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 189

Auxiliary Graphics

Cursor Tab (SmartSketch Settings Dialog Box)

Cursor Setup - Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the pointer.

Locate Zone - Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a region
around the pointer.

The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate zone so
that you do not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For example, if part
of an element is within the locate zone, the software recognizes a Point On
relationship. The size of the locate zone is indicated by a circle around the center
of the pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid.

Intent Zone - Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow drawing
commands to interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are
valid.

Preview - Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected
relationship.

190 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Linking and Embedding Objects

Linking and Embedding Objects

This software is compatible with Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) software.
You can transfer text, numbers, or images between drawings or documents that were
created with this software and other OLE applications. You can move whole
documents around or just parts of a document that you select. The information that
you move is an object.

For example, you can use Microsoft Word to make a comment and then display the
comment in your drawing, or you can insert a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a
drawing. You can even create a drawing that contains another drawing, notes from
Microsoft Word, and an Excel worksheet.

You can insert information created in another application with one of many methods:

You can cut and paste an item to delete it from one location and move it to
another location.

You can copy and paste an item to duplicate it in another location.

Linking stores data in one location and places a copy with a link in another
location. When you change the original data, the copy can be updated either
automatically or manually.

Embedding copies information and stores the information in another document

that was created in a different application. If you change the embedded object, the
original information does not change and vice versa.

Linking or Embedding
An object is data from one application that you insert in a drawing. You can link or
embed information between drawings or documents that were created with this
software and OLE software.

Linking stores data in one location and places a copy and a link in another location.
The linked data is stored in the source document itself. When you paste the
information in the destination document with the Paste Link option, a reference point
or box is inserted into the destination document. This box displays the information
that you pasted. When you change the original data, the pasted data is updated either
automatically or manually. You can edit the linked information by opening the source
document. You can insert linked information with the Paste Special command on the
Edit menu. You can link an entire document to another document by inserting the
information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu.

Embedding copies data in one document and stores the information in another
document. If you change the copied data, the original information does not change,

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 191

Linking and Embedding Objects

and vice versa. You can embed information with the Paste Special command on the
Edit menu. You can embed an entire document inside another document by inserting
the information with the Insert > Object command on the Edit menu.

If you want to keep the document size small, then link the data to another document.
Linked information increases the document size only by the size of the displayed
image, not by the size of the data itself. Linking is also useful when you want to share
information in many different places and set that information to update automatically.
For example, if you want to display a drawing in several different reports that you
created in Microsoft Word, you could link the drawing inside the documents that
contained the reports. Then, later, you could update the drawing by editing it in this
software. Each report would automatically display the results of the drawing updates.

If document size is not an important factor, then use embedding. Embedded objects
make the file size larger.

Embedding is useful when the person viewing the document with the embedded
information does not have access to the software that created the object. The person
can still view the information if it is embedded in the document. For example, if you
wanted to send out several drawings for review, you could embed each drawing into a
Microsoft Word document and send the Microsoft Word document to each reviewer.

Embedded information is also a good choice if the information does not need
updating.

Embedding by Cutting or Copying, and Pasting

The easiest way to embed an object is to use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands on
the Edit menu in any OLE software. If you copy or paste information into an
application in which you cannot edit the information, the software will automatically
embed the information in the document. You can then edit the embedded information
with the software that created it. If you cannot edit the information, the information
appears as a static picture.

192 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Linking and Embedding Objects

Notes:

If you want to copy the information, and not remove it from its original
location, press Ctrl while dragging.

On the Paste Special dialog box be sure that you select Paste and not Paste
Link.

Or if you want to link the object, select Paste Link on the dialog box.

Linking or Embedding an Object

If you want to insert an existing document, you can use Edit > Insert > Object, too.
On the dialog box, select the Create From File option and then enter the name, or
browse to the document. The entire document is embedded into the drawing.

Notes:

If you want to embed the existing object, make sure you have not selected
Link on the dialog box.

If you want to link the existing object, select Link on the dialog box.

Editing a Linked or Embedded Object

To edit an object, you can double-click the object to open the software that created
the object. If you do not have the source software installed, you cannot edit the object.
The menus and toolbars of the current software are temporarily replaced by the
menus and toolbars of the software that just opened.

Note:

You can click commands on a shortcut menu to activate the software that
created the object. To get the shortcut menu, right-click the embedded object.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 193

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

The Engineering Data Editor (EDE) uses a grid or tabular format to display the
query results for the database. The default EDE is automatically displayed in the
lower left of the main window, and you can also open the EDE to appear in the
Design window using the Window > New > Engineering Data Editor command.

Note:

The maximum number of cells that can be displayed in the EDE is

approximately 350,000. This limit is imposed by the Microsoft FlexGrid
Control, which is used in the EDE. The number of rows that can be displayed
varies with the number of columns in your layout. If your database query
returns more than 350,000 cells, the Query Results dialog box opens. You
can then choose to refine your query in order to display fewer items or to enter
report-only mode in the EDE and run a report on your query results.

Types of EDE
There are two types of Engineering Data Editors (EDEs); the EDE opened in the
Design Window and the default EDE. Both allow you to view and edit objects
(model data) for a drawing in a tabular format.

Important

To distinguish between the default Engineering Data Editor Window and the
Engineering Data Editor Window opened in the Design Window, use the
title bar. The default Engineering Data Editor Window displays the title
―Engineering Data Editor‖ in the title bar. An Engineering Data Editor
Window opened and maximized in the Design Window does not have a title.
If the Drawing View and the Engineering Data Editor Windows are tiled in
the Design Window, the title of the Engineering Data Editor Window will
display the drawing name along with the words ―Engineering Data Editor‖.

EDE in the Design Window

You can open the Engineering Data Editor to appear in the Design Window using
the Window > New > Engineering Data Editor Command. Using the EDE in the
Design Window, you can also define one or more Engineering Data Editors for a
drawing.

194 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Note:
The Engineering Data Editor (Window > New > Engineering Data Editor)
opened in the Design Window should be used to edit information ONLY for
the active drawing(s); not the other (non-active) drawings.

Default EDE
The default Engineering Data Editor Window is automatically displayed in the
lower left of the main window when you select View > Toolbars > Engineering
Data Editor, select the Engineering Data Editor Button from the Main Toolbar,
or select View > Display > Engineering Data Editor.

Note:
You can use the default Engineering Data Editor to edit data for all objects
in the plant; objects in the active drawing, the stockpiles, and the other (non-
active) drawings.

The EDE Toolbar

At the top of the EDE is the EDE toolbar. There are three menu buttons; Actions,
Edit, and View. The Actions Menu contains commands for placing multiple
representations of an item, deleting stockpile items, or moving items between
stockpiles. The Edit Menu allows you to copy and paste values from one cell to
another cell in the EDE and to select all the items in the view in order to create a
select set. The View Menu displays the commands that help you customize and
manipulate the layout and content of the EDE. You can click the down-arrow next to
the menu button to expose the available commands.

The Item Type List on the toolbar contains filters that query the database and display
the corresponding items in the EDE. If you want to list all items select Plant Item
from the list.

The EDE Scope is where you view items in the Active Drawing, the Active
Drawing Stockpile, the Stockpile, or Other Drawings. By default, initially only the
Active Drawing and Active Drawing Stockpile buttons are selected. You can also
filter the display by using the buttons that correspond to the stockpile (plant) and
other drawings.

The Asking Filter button displays the Filter tab of the Advanced Table
Properties dialog box, from which you can quickly filter the EDE display by
selecting a base filter and properties appropriate for the selected item type.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 195

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

You can re-query and thereby refresh the EDE display by clicking the Refresh
button. The summary box displays a count of items which shows the
comparison between the number of items in the view and the total number of items
that exist in the database of the type chosen from the list.

Active Active Other

Drawing Drawing Drawings
Actions Menu Stockpile Refresh

Edit Menu Item Type List Stockpile Asking

Filter
Count of
View Menu Items

Query Results Dialog Box

The maximum number of cells that can be displayed in the EDE is 350,000. The
number of rows that can be displayed varies with the number of columns in your
layout. For example, if your layout contains 10 columns, approximately 35,000 rows
can be displayed in the EDE. If your database query returns more than the allowable
number of rows, the Query Results Dialog Box opens as shown in the image below.
It displays options for continuing your work in the Engineering Data Editor when
you have requested more information than can appear in the interface. You can either
refine your query or run a report with your query results.

196 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Maximum Allowed - Displays the currently allowed number of items in the

Engineering Data Editor.

Rows Returned - Displays the number of items that your query returned.

Options - Allows you to choose between refining your query or entering report-only
mode.

Refine Query Definition - Allows you to use the Additional Filter Criteria list
in this dialog box to refine your query in order to display an allowed number of
items in the view.

Continue with this query so that I can generate a plant or personal report -
Causes the Engineering Data Editor to enable only these commands: Edit view,
Save view, Delete view, My Reports, and Plant Reports. This option is useful
when creating a report for large data sets such as an entire plant database.

Additional Filter Criteria - Displays all new criteria to add to the current filter. To
add to or modify the definition list, you must select a line in the list and then define or
edit the property in the Edit group.

Match all - Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass
through the filter.

Match any - Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering
criteria pass through the filter. Match any is the default matching method.

Edit - Allows you to define or edit a single line of filter definition criteria.

Property - Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Examples of
properties include Equipment Type, Instrument Loop Item Tag, and Estimated
Length. You define or modify filtering criteria by selecting a property, an
operator, and a value.

Operator - Specifies the relationship between the property and its value.
Relationships include, for example, greater than, >; equal to, =; not equal to, <>;
and so forth.

Value - Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property
column. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box, you
must type a value, which can be free text, or choose null. You can type a percent
sign, %, as a wildcard character to find multiple characters, or type a question
mark, ?, as a wildcard character for a single character. Do not use an asterisk, *,
in the Value box.

Add - Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the
options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 197

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Delete - Removes the selected criterion from the definition list. This button is
available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.

Customize the EDE

Commands on the View menu allow you to customize the display of the EDE further.
You can use the Display Settings command, for instance, to color code items
according to the stockpile that they are currently in. Use View > Edit View to display
the Edit View dialog box, which allows you to define the items that you want to see
in the EDE. You customize a filter and layout for the display on the Advanced Table
Properties dialog box.

Edit View Dialog Box

The Edit View Dialog Box enables you to select the item types, filters, and layouts
for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. This dialog box appears when you
right-click an existing table and select Edit View.

Item type - Lists all the item types that you can select (for example, equipment or
motors).

Filter - Lists all of the filters that have been saved for the selected item type.

Layout - Lists all of the layouts that have been saved for the selected item type. For a
list of default layouts, see Default Table Layouts.

Advanced - Displays the Advanced View Properties dialog box, where you can
define and save filters or layouts for the Tabular or Engineering Data Editor. You
can specify the default filter and layout for a certain item type also. Specify brief and
bulk properties in this dialog box, too. Brief and bulk properties appear in the
Properties window when you select the Show Brief Properties, Copy Bulk
Properties, or Paste Bulk Properties commands from the Properties window
toolbar.

198 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Default Table Layouts

The software includes several default layouts. You can use them to base your own
layouts on by changing the layout name, adding or deleting properties, and saving
under a new name. The different layouts listed below are included with SmartPlant
P&ID.

Area Break Nozzle

Drawing OPC

Equipment Package

Equipment: Component Pipe Run

Equipment: Heat Transfer Piping Component

Equipment: Mechanical Plant Item

Equipment: Other Plant Item Group Other

Equipment: Vessel Representation

Hydraulic Circuit Safety Class

Instrument Signal Run

Instrument Loop System

Item Note

Advanced View Properties Dialog Box

The Advanced View Properties dialog box allows you to define, select, and save
filters and layouts for the Tabular view or Engineering Data Editor. This dialog
box opens when you click Advanced on the Table Properties dialog box.

Filter Tab (Advanced View Properties Dialog Box)

The Filter Tab allows you to define, select, and save a filter for the Tabular view or
Engineering Data Editor.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 199

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Base filter - Displays the name of a saved filter.

Name - Displays the name of the filter, as it is defined in Filter Manager.

Default - Indicates if the named filter is the default filter for the item type
selected on the Table Properties dialog box. You can change a filter to the
default by selecting this box.

Browse - Opens the Select Filter dialog box, which allows you to select a base
filter.

Definition - Includes areas to add, remove, or edit filter criteria.

Match all - Specifies that items matching ALL of the filtering criteria pass
through the filter.

Match any - Specifies that items matching any one or more of the filtering
criteria pass through the filter. Match any is the default matching method.

Add - Places a new entry at the end of the existing definition list and enables the
options in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.

Delete - Removes the selected criterions from the definition list. This button is
available only when you select a criterion in the definition list.

Edit - Displays options that allow you to define or edit a single line of filter definition
criteria.

200 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Property - Displays a list of all properties for a certain item type. Examples of
properties include revision number and name. You define or modify filtering
criteria by selecting a property, an operator, and a value.

Operator - Specifies the relationship between the property and its value.
Relationships include, for example, greater than, >; equal to, =; not equal to, <>;
and so forth.

Value - Lists appropriate values for the property specified in the Property
column. If a list of attributes is not already associated with the Value box, you
must type a value, which can be free text, or choose null. You can type a percent
sign, %, as a wildcard character to find multiple characters, or type a question
mark, ?, as a wildcard character for a single character. Do not use an asterisk, *,
in the Value box.

Layout Tab (Advanced View Properties Dialog Box)

The Layout Tab defines, selects, and saves a layout for the Tabular or Engineering
Data Editor.

Name:

Name - Displays the name of a saved layout. You can enter a new layout name
and then click Save to save the layout for re-use. Or, you can select any of the
layouts in the list.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 201

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Default - Indicates whether the named layout is the default layout for the item
type on the Table Properties dialog box. You can designate a layout as the
default by checking this box and then clicking Save.

Usage - Lists the property display types associated with the Properties window.
Options include a blank value, Brief, Bulk, and Brief/Bulk. The selected item
type and display properties define what appears in the Properties window when
you select the Show Brief Properties, Copy Bulk Properties, or Paste Bulk
Properties commands from the Properties window toolbar. In order for your
choice in the Usage box to take effect, you must exit and reenter the design
software.

Delete (Name) - Removes the named layout.

Save - Saves the data in this dialog box as a named layout. Layout names must be
unique.

Note:

Saving a layout is not the same as saving a view in the Engineering Data
Editor. For more information about saving views, see Save an Engineering
Data Editor View

Definition - Displays all defined criteria associated with the selected layout. This
group contains two list views. In order to add to or modify either list, you must select
a line in the list and then define or edit the property in the Edit group.

Contents:

Display Property - Lists the columns that appear in the Engineering Data
Editor. To edit an entry, select it and modify the property in the Edit group.

Caption (Definition) - Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering
Data Editor.

Sorting:

Sort Property - Lists the properties that apply to the item type specified in the
Table Properties dialog box.

Order - Lists the sort orders Ascending and Descending. You can select one.

Type - Lists the sort types Numeric and Alphanumeric. You select one.

Add - Adds a new entry at the end of the existing entries and enables the options in
the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.

Insert - Places a new entry above the currently selected entry and enables the options
in the Edit group so that you can edit the new entry.

202 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Delete (Definition) - Removes the currently selected entry.

Up - Moves the currently selected entry up one line. Moving a row up either moves a
display column to the left or moves a sort order up, depending on the row you have
selected.

Down - Moves the currently selected entry down one line. Moving a row down either
moves a display column to the right or moves a sort order down, depending on the
row you have selected.

Edit - Allows you to edit a single entry selected in either the Display Property or
Sort Property list views. If you select an entry in the Display Property view, the
Edit group allows you to edit the property and the caption. If you select an entry in
the Sort Property view, the Edit group allows you to edit the property, order and
type.

Property - Displays a list of all the properties that apply to the item type defined in
the Table Properties dialog box. If you select an entry in the Display Property
view, you can specify the property and its caption. If you select an entry in the Sort
Property view, you can specify the property, its order, and its type.

Caption (Edit) - Displays the caption for each column in the Engineering Data
Editor.

Save View Command

The Engineering Data Editor > View > Save View opens the Save View dialog
box, which allows you to name and save the current Engineering Data Editor. These
custom views appear at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor
toolbar.

Save View Dialog Box

The Save View dialog box allows you to specify a name for your custom
Engineering Data Editor. This name, which applies to the currently active EDE, is
displayed at the bottom of the filter list on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar with
other saved views. Open this dialog box by clicking View > Save View in the EDE.

Name - Provides space for you to type in the name of your custom view.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 203

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

AutoFilter Command
The Engineering Data Editor > View > AutoFilter allows you to filter the items
displayed in the Engineering Data Editor. When you click AutoFilter, arrows
appear at the top of each column. Click the arrow at the top of the column that
contains the data that you want to filter on and choose the value from the list that
appears. For instance, if the Engineering Data Editor displays Equipment: Vessels,
but you want to see only vertical drums, use the AutoFilter command (click the
arrow at the top of the Eq Subclass column and choose vertical drums).

To create more elaborate filters and displays, you need to use the Edit View
command and enter options on the Table Properties dialog box and the Advanced
Table Properties dialog box.

Note:

Select this command again to deactivate it.

Freeze Panes Command

The Engineering Data Editor > View > Freeze Panes allows you to scroll through
the Engineering Data Editor while keeping the display of specified rows and
columns constant. For instance, the first column can contain the item tag, but you
want to always see the item tag as you scroll to the right end of the rows to view the
supplier. You can accomplish this layout by using the Freeze Panes command.

Display Settings Command

The Engineering Data Editor > View > Display Settings opens the Display
Settings dialog box, which allows you to specify various display options for the
Engineering Data Editor. For example, you can choose the size of icon that is
displayed in the view, and you can specify the font that items in the Stockpile are
listed in. You can choose that read-only cells are filled with a special background
color.

Plant Editing (Editing Properties in the EDE)

Plant Editing refers to the usage of the Engineering Data Editor (EDE) to manage
data for all objects in the plant; objects in both the active and non-active drawings.
Active drawing(s) refers to the drawing(s) currently open and visible in the Design
Window. Non-active drawings refer to all other drawings; every drawing except the
one currently active.

204 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

You can edit read/write properties viewed in the table by selecting a table cell and
filling in the appropriate information. To save the information, you must TAB or
click out of the cell. If the property has a select list associated with it, you choose the
value from the select list. If a calculation program is associated, the ellipse
(calculation) button will display as you click the property cell. You can then click the
button to activate the calculation program and assign the property value. If the cell
shows a read-only property or a property that is only automatically generated by
validation, you cannot edit that cell. You can select an entire row by clicking the icon
in the left-most column of the table. The contents of cells can be copied to other cells
using Ctrl+C (copy) and Crtl+V (paste) or right click > Copy/Paste, if the cell
contents are compatible. The contents of cells can also be deleted. To delete the
contents of multiple cells at one time, you can delete the contents of one cell which
will make it blank or null. Then, you can copy the blank or null cell and paste in the
other cells.

Notes:

To distinguish between the read-only and read/write properties in the EDE,

use the View > Display Settings command. By customizing the display, you
have a visual representation of the property access level (read-only or
read/write) as the access level will change according to the status of drawings
in the Plant (open or closed).

To view the non-active drawings in the EDE, the user must activate the
Other Drawings Button. Selecting this button also displays items in the
drawing stockpiles of the other drawings.

Active and Non-Active Drawings

For the active drawing, you can view and edit the property values using any
Engineering Data Editor window and the Properties window. For the other, non-
active drawings, you can view the property values using any Engineering Data
Editor window. However, you can ONLY use the default Engineering Data Editor
to edit the property values for the non-active drawings.

Notes:

The Undo buffer for the active drawing is cleared when editing non-active
drawings in the EDE.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 205

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

The Undo command is not available when editing non-active drawings.

When properties are displayed in the EDE as read/write for a non-active
drawing and another user opens that drawing, you will not be able to edit
those properties. When you try to edit, the following ―Changed Data‖ dialog
will appear and display the message, ―The selected item‘s information has
changed since the last query. Database will be requeried.‖ After you click
‗OK‘, the EDE will refresh and the properties will display in the EDE view as
read-only.

The automatic update of data does not update the sort order. For example,
changing the Fluid Code of connected pipe runs may result in validation
changing the Pipe Run Item Tags. If the EDE layout is sorted by the Pipe Run
Item Tag, the sort order will not update as the Item Tags are changed. To
update the sort order, you can click the Refresh button.

Editing objects in non-active drawings renders the drawing out-of-date with

respect to model items. However, the database contains the current data and
any reports generated will also contain the current data. You should update the
drawing prior to printing from Drawing Manager by running Update or
opening the drawing. (Opening the drawing in SmartPlant P&ID will update
the graphics.)

Working with the Stockpile in the EDE

SmartPlant P&ID uses a stockpile concept to store data that does not currently reside
in the drawing, such as certain items deleted from the drawing, off-page connector
mates, instrument loops, packages and systems, and imported data. The stockpile may
be accessed using the Engineering Data Editor. The Stockpile contains items that
are visible to all users who are working in the plant. The Drawing Stockpile contains
items accessible only to that drawing. You may click on the Stockpile and/or
Drawing Stockpile toolbar buttons to view items either in one or both of the two
views of the Stockpile.

You may move items from one stockpile view to another by using the Actions toolbar
button in the Engineering Data Editor.

206 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Deleting Symbols
When certain symbols are deleted from the drawing view, they will reside in the
Stockpile. This means they have been deleted from the drawing, but are still available
to be placed elsewhere in that drawing or in another drawing. There are two factors
that govern whether or not an item will go to the Stockpile once it‘s deleted from a
drawing:

1. The Tag Reqd Flag property is set to True (properties are defined using Catalog
Manager).

2. The Item Type must be specified in the Options Manager. Select the Reference
Data Settings and the Stockpile Items field.

You may delete items residing in the Stockpile by right clicking on the item and
selecting Delete Stockpile Item.

Note:

When deleting an item from the drawing, a right-click displays the option to
Delete or Delete from model. Selecting Delete from model bypasses the
stockpile, and deletes the item from the database and the drawing.

Off Page Connector Mates

When an off page connector (OPC) is placed in the drawing, its mate may
automatically go to the stockpile or may be placed in the drawing stockpile of the
mating drawing. When the mating drawing is defined, the matching off page
connector can be placed on the pipeline. This will associate the lines in the two
drawings.

Delete a Connector From the Model

1. Right-click the connector that you want to remove from the model.

2. From the shortcut menu, click Delete From Model.

Notes:

This command is available only when the partner of the selected connector
is stored in the Stockpile.

If you want to move the connector to the Stockpile instead of deleting it

completely from the database, click Delete on the shortcut menu.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 207

Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Moving and Placing Stockpile Items

You can move the items that reside in stockpiles (the Plant Stockpile or drawing
stockpiles) from one stockpile to another, or you can place them in a drawing or
delete them from the model altogether.

You view the items in a stockpile in the Engineering Data Editor (EDE). In
particular click Stockpile to view items in the Stockpile, or click Active Drawing
Stockpile to view items in the stockpile of the active drawing. Be sure that the other
item buttons on the Engineering Data Editor toolbar (that is, the Active Drawing or
Other Drawings buttons) are not active when you want to view stockpile items
alone.

In the EDE, the Action menu contains the commands for manipulating stockpile
items. These commands make it possible to place or move or delete stockpile items.
You can also access some of these commands from the Engineering Data Editor
shortcut menu, which opens when you right-click in the EDE.

You have the capability to place an item from a stockpile directly onto an open
drawing. You enter placement mode when you click the icon associated with a
stockpile item in the left-most column of the EDE.

You can import items into the Stockpile, too, by importing reports with the File >
Import > Data File command on the main toolbar.

Moving Between Stockpiles

The Move to Different Stockpile command in the Engineering Data Editor allows
you to move an item from one stockpile to a different stockpile.

Notes:

Plant item groups, such as instrument loops, packages, safety classes, and so
forth, frequently reside in a stockpile with their members residing on
drawings. Moving the plant item group itself to another stockpile has special
limitations:

o From a drawing stockpile to the Stockpile - No constraints apply.

This action can occur at anytime.

o From the Stockpile to a drawing stockpile - If the plant item group

contains only items in the destination drawing or does not contain
items in any drawing, this action is allowed.

o From a drawing stockpile to another drawing stockpile - Same

constraint as above applies.

208 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Navigating in the Engineering Data Editor

Plant item groups are listed in Data Dictionary Manager.

Move to Different Stockpile Dialog Box

Opens when you right-click a stockpile item icon in the Engineering Data Editor
and select Move to Different Stockpile. You can move your selected stockpile item
into the drawing stockpile of another drawing.

Tree view - Allows you to navigate in the plant hierarchy in order to display the
drawing into which stockpile you want to move the selected item.

List view - Displays a list of available drawings that can accept the selected stockpile
item.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 209

System Editing

System Editing
The Tools > System Editing command allows propagation of property values
between related items. If you select System Editing and a check mark displays by
the command, the function is active. When the command is active and you make
additions or changes to a drawing, the changes are propagated according to
relationships and rules.

Notes:
If the Enable System Editing setting is set to Yes in Options Manager,
then every P&ID drawing in the plant will have System Editing enabled.
You can turn System Editing off but when you turn it back on, it does not
attempt to propagate any prior drawing changes.

System Editing is not supported from or to plant item groups such as

loops and packages.

When a new item is placed from the Catalog or the Stockpile, a new relationship is
created and property values flow across the new relationship as specified in the rules.
The flow of property values is as follows.

Properties - The properties that can flow across this relationship are those that are
listed as consistency criteria in all of the applicable rules.

Local Editing - A property value can be copied in either direction across the new
relationship but is never spread any further.

When an existing item is modified and a new relationship is created, property values
are not copied across the relationship if property values already exist. If the endpoint
handle of an existing pipe run is dragged and dropped onto an existing piping
component, propagation is initiated. Consistency checking is performed at the new
relationship and any differences in property values are displayed as inconsistencies.

When a directional property, for example, Flow Direction and Slope Direction, is
propagated, it is not enough to set the same value on all items the propagation scope.
The direction of the underlying geometry must be compared to the direction of the
geometry of the start item. One of the possible property values must be selected
based on the direction of the geometry. In cases where the direction of the geometry
cannot be compared (such as a midpoint branch condition) no propagation is possible.

Property values that are edited through Plant Editing will propagate according to the
System Editing rules defined for the plant provided that all connected drawings are
closed.

210 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 System Editing

System Editing Command

When System Editing is enabled for a plant, changed property values are
automatically spread or propagated to related items according to the currently defined
consistency criteria. In certain cases, you may want to set a property value on one
item only and not allow it to be propagated to any related items. The System Editing
command (on the Tools menu and the toolbar) allows you to turn off the propagation
functionality temporarily during a design session. After the change has been made,
you can use this same command to turn it back on again. System Editing is always
turned on when you start a new design session. System Editing can be enabled or
disabled for the entire plant by means of the Enable System Editing setting that is
exposed through Options Manager.

The Scope of System Editing

Connectivity - All objects that are connected to the selected object are candidates for
inclusion in the propagation (System Editing) process.

Rules - The consistency criteria specified in rules define which properties are
propagated and in which direction. The propagation scope can be expanded across a
relationship if there is an applicable rule for the property being modified.

Inconsistencies - The propagation scope is not expanded past an existing

inconsistency for the property being modified. Using System Editing does not
resolve inconsistencies. You must resolve the inconsistency.

Breaks (Break Labels)- Propagation breaks can be defined for specified properties at
specified relationships in a design. The propagation scope is not expanded past a
break for the property being modified. For this reason, it could be helpful to place
these at an early stage of the data input process.

Break Components – Components can be defined with an option to break the nominal
diameter or with a filter defining other specified properties that will break at that
item. The propagation scope is not expanded past a break component for the property
being modified.

Plant Editing of Objects in an Active Drawing

Plant Editing of object data in an active drawing will propagate data within the active
drawing only. Data will not propagate beyond the active drawing boundary (i.e.
through Off-Page Connectors) to other drawings.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 211

System Editing

Note:

An active drawing is in a locked state, and any changes made in a non-active

drawing will not propagate data back across OPCs into the active drawing.

Plant Editing of Objects in Non-Active Drawings

Plant Editing of object data in a non-active drawing will apply the plant‘s System
Editing rules, and propagate data across Off-Page Connectors (OPCs) to other non-
active drawings when all the connected drawings are closed; not currently open by
ANY user on ANY machine. The updated data will display automatically in the EDE
for all the drawings without a Refresh command.

System Editing and Consistency Checking

You can effectively propagate a changed property value across drawing boundaries.
If a changed property value is propagated and it reaches an OPC, it simply stops at
that point. An inconsistency indicator at the OPC shows that the value in the active
drawing is inconsistent with the value on the connected pipe in the continuation
drawing. To resolve this type of inconsistency, the user must open the continuation
drawing. With the continuation drawing open, the user can double click on the
inconsistency indicator to display the Consistency Check dialog. One of the
solutions available for resolving inconsistencies is to copy the property value from the
first drawing into the active drawing. When this solution is used, the property value
from the pipe run in the first drawing is copied to the pipe run in the active drawing
and spreads outward from there according to the standard propagation rules. Thus,
property values can be propagated across drawing boundaries.

Inconsistencies - System Editing never expands across an inconsistency for the

property being propagated. For a given set of connected items with a consistent
property value, System Editing allows you to easily change that value to a new
value. However, if the items are not consistent to begin with (inconsistencies exist),
then System Editing will not automatically make them consistent. Other tools are
available (such as Solutions on the Consistency Check dialog box) for resolving
inconsistencies.

Break Components - Some components inherently limit the copying and suppress
the consistency checking of certain properties. For example, a reducer is a break
component for the Nominal Diameter property. When changing the Nominal
Diameter in a pipeline, the spread of that change is limited by any reducers that exist
in that pipeline. The consistency checking that would normally be done between the
connected pipes is also suppressed at the reducer.

212 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 System Editing

A break component can be created for any property or collection of properties of a

pipe run. To create a break component, you must first create a special filter. This filter
must apply to pipe runs and must include the properties to be broken as criteria in the
filter. The value for each property in the filter is not important. The final step in
creating a break component is to open the symbol in Catalog Manager and select the
Property Breaks command to select the filter. After creating a break component,
when it is placed into a drawing, it breaks the specified properties.

Break Labels - The consistency criteria specified in the rules define the general
behavior of the properties. Break labels provide a way to define exceptions to the
general rules. A break label provides a visible and plottable symbol that signifies the
end of one property value condition and the beginning of a new condition along a
pipe. A changed property value is never propagated across a break label for that
property. A break label also suppresses consistency checking for the property it
breaks. A break label can break one or more properties.

A break label can be created for any property or collection of properties of a pipe run.
A break label is created in the Catalog Manager just like any other label, except that
the Label Type property is set to Attribute Break. A SmartText field must be created
for each property that is to be broken. In many cases the graphical shape of the label
indicates which properties are broken. In these cases, the Visible flag on the
SmartText is set to False so that the text is not visible. It is also normal to turn the
leader line on within the Catalog Manager so that it is automatically displayed at
placement time. All of the symbols under Piping\Segment Breaks in the delivered
catalog are break labels.

A break label can only be placed at the endpoint of a graphical pipe line where it
connects to a component or a branch point. Furthermore, a break label can only be
placed at a point where the specified properties are listed in the consistency criteria
for the applicable rules. The break label stays attached to the point it was placed on
and cannot be dragged away from it.

Understanding System Editing and OPCs

An OPC can be placed as a freestanding item in a drawing or it can be placed onto an
existing pipe run. If an OPC has been placed as a freestanding item, a pipe run can be
attached to it. When the relationship between the OPC and the pipe run is created
(either by placing the OPC or by placing the pipe run), the system finds the applicable
rules, copies the specified properties and evaluates the consistency criteria.

When the first OPC (of an OPC pair) is connected to a pipe run, there is no pipe run
connected to the mate OPC. Since there is no other pipe run, the system will not find
any applicable rules.

When the second OPC (of an OPC pair) is connected to a pipe run, however, the
system will find the rules that apply to this pair of pipe runs. The system copies the

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 213

System Editing

specified properties from the pipe run in the other drawing to the pipe run in the
active drawing. This copy operation will not overwrite any existing values. (The
Copy is forced into the Copy If Null mode.) The properties that are copied across the
OPC are propagated into the active drawing. This can mean that property values on
items other than the connected pipe run are affected. However, this is only done if the
current value is Null. Existing values are not overwritten. After the copy process is
complete, the consistency criteria are evaluated and inconsistencies are generated for
all inconsistent properties.

Each time a drawing is opened, a routine is executed to update all of the OPCs in that
drawing. Also, the relationship between the OPC and the connected pipe run is
updated. During this update, the rule base is searched to find all of the applicable
rules. If the mate OPC has been connected to a new pipe run since the last time this
drawing was opened, it may find a different set of rules that apply. After finding the
applicable rules, the consistency criteria are evaluated and inconsistencies are
generated for all inconsistent properties. Property values are not automatically copied
across OPCs during this processing. If you want to copy changed property values
across OPCs, you can use the Solutions that are available in the Consistency Check
dialog box.

The text in the label on the OPC is also updated. If the mate OPC has been placed
into a different drawing since the late time this drawing was opened, this change will
be reflected in the updated label.

For Plant Editing to properly propagate data across OPCs from a non-active drawing
to other connected, non-active drawings in the Plant, a relationship between the OPC
and the continuing pipe run must be established. When the first OPC of the pair is
placed and connected to a pipe run, there is no relationship since the partner OPC has
not yet been placed. After the partner OPC is placed and connected to a pipe run in
the other drawing, a relationship is established because it knows of its partner OPC
and the continuing pipe run. This placement of the partner OPC does not
automatically refresh the first OPC placed. To fully update the relationships, you
must close and reopen the drawing containing the first OPC placed.

214 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 System Editing

System Editing and Changing Property Values

Across OPCs
When a property value is changed on a pipe run that is connected to an OPC, it is
expected that the connected pipe run in the continuation drawing should be changed
in a corresponding manner. You can achieve this result with a workflow that pulls the
change into the other drawing.

This workflow allows you to pull a changed property value across an OPC into the
continuation drawing. When a property value is changed on a pipe run that is
connected to an OPC, an inconsistency is generated at the OPC. This inconsistency
indicates that the two connected pipes have different values. To resolve this
inconsistency, you must close the active drawing and open the continuation drawing.
In that drawing, another inconsistency is shown at the mate OPC. You can double-
click on that inconsistency to display the Consistency Check dialog box. A solution
is displayed to Copy the new value from the first drawing onto the pipe run in the
active drawing. If you apply this solution, the value is copied into the active drawing
and propagated to the related items. This resolves the inconsistency in the second
drawing. The next time the first drawing is opened, the inconsistency will be resolved
there as well.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 215

Consistency Checking

Consistency Checking
Consistency checking verifies the suitability of work that a designer performs while
creating the drawing. The software verifies, in real-time, if the composition of a
drawing and the underlying data model satisfies rules that your company has defined.
The software includes pre-defined standard industry design propagation: for example,
pipe runs inherit properties from nozzles. Additional consistency checking and design
propagation are defined in Rule Manager.

Consistency checking continuously monitors your work when you change or add
items to a drawing. The software displays all the inconsistencies, describes specific
problems, and offers hints. Using these solutions, you can decide the best method to
resolve an inconsistency.

Consistency Checking and Break Labels

A property break is a point in a connected network of objects where a property value
changes. A user can define a property break by the placement of a break label. A
property break is an exception to the consistency criteria defined in a rule. A property
break defines a limitation to the spread of the propagation scope. Whereas rules
provide the general definition of the scope, property breaks provide specific
limitations of the scope.

The Consistency Check dialog shows the consistency criteria that apply at the
selected relationship indicator. All of the properties that are copied and compared
across this connection are shown. When the user has placed a break label, the copy
and compare columns show icons that indicate that no copy and compare operations
are performed for the properties in the label.

Break labels can be placed directly from the catalog explorer. A group of break labels
is currently delivered under Piping\Segment Breaks. Break label placement is
enhanced so that a break label can only be placed at a connection point where the
specified properties are being propagated. When a break label is placed interactively,
the corresponding property break data is added to the Relationship object.

Break labels can be deleted in the standard way using the Delete command. When a
break label is deleted the break is removed from the Relationship object. However, if
there were another break label at this same point that also breaks this property, then
the break would not be removed.

Consistency Check Command

Right-click an inconsistency indicator and choose Consistency Check to display the
Consistency Check dialog box. As you create a drawing, consistency checking

216 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Consistency Checking

monitors your drawing for design discrepancies. If a location in the drawing has only
one or multiple inconsistencies, you can correct the problems by reviewing them on
the Consistency Check dialog box.

Consistency Check Dialog Box

The Consistency Check Dialog Box opens when you display the properties of an
inconsistency indicator, and lists the inconsistencies, their specific problem area, and
solutions for resolving the inconsistency. The dialog box also displays the
consistency criteria and propagation breaks that apply at the selected relationship
indicator.

You open this dialog box by right-clicking an inconsistency indicator and choosing
Consistency Check from the shortcut menu. You can also select Edit > Consistency
Check. When this dialog box first appears, the software automatically selects the first
item in the list. Other sections of the dialog box provide details that are specifically
related to the selected inconsistency.

All inconsistencies that occur at a junction, regardless of severity, are listed on the
Consistency Check dialog box. When you select one of the inconsistencies in the
list, the software displays information specific to that inconsistency in the Solutions
box. A specific example of this type can involve data inconsistencies for nominal pipe
diameter, normal operating temperature, and alternate design pressure between a
piping component and pipe run. This represents three different problems but at the
same junction.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 217

Consistency Checking

The Consistency Check dialog box contains the Inconsistencies Tab and the
Consistency Criteria Tab.

Inconsistencies Tab
All of the properties that are compared by consistency checking and copied across
this connection by propagation are shown on these tabs. The information shown here
is very similar to the information shown on the Consistency tab of the Rule
Properties dialog in the Rule Manager. Open the Consistency Check dialog box
by selecting Edit > Consistency Check.

Item 1 - Displays the inconsistency, item type, and item tag for the first item that is
connected by the active relationship. When the Consistency Check dialog box first
appears, all items involved in the inconsistency are selected.

Relationship - Displays the number for the active relationship and allows you to
select the relationship to be reviewed. The drop-down list contains a number for each
relationship that exists at the selected point. The graphic relationship indicator that
corresponds to the number shown in this control is highlighted.

Item 2 - Displays the inconsistency, item type, and item tag for the second item that
is connected by the active relationship. When the Consistency Check dialog box
first appears, all items involved in the inconsistency are selected.

Highlight item 1 - Place a check mark in the check box to highlight the item in the
drawing. This helps you to quickly locate the selected object. By default, this option
is not selected.

Highlight item 2 - Place a check mark in the check box to highlight the item in the
drawing. This helps you to quickly locate the selected object. By default, this option
is not selected.

Inconsistencies - Displays the inconsistencies at the selected relationship. For each

inconsistency, the status, severity and description are displayed. The icons used for
the status column are the same as the icons used for inconsistencies in the Drawing
View. The first inconsistency in the list is automatically selected. You can select any
of the inconsistencies with a mouse click or the arrow keys.

Description - Displays the actual error or warning. For a lengthy error or warning, a
ToolTip appears to reveal the entire description. You cannot change the inconsistency
description, which is provided for information only.

Solutions - Displays the list of available solutions for the selected inconsistency. The
same solution that was previously selected is automatically selected again. If none
was previously selected, the first solution in the list is automatically selected. Some of
the solutions copy a property value across the relationship and initiate propagation.
When one of these solutions is selected, the propagation scope is highlighted. This

218 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Consistency Checking

shows the items that will be changed before they are modified. After selecting an
inconsistency from the Inconsistencies list you can select the correct solution from
this list and after clicking Apply, the selected solution is performed.

Apply - Performs the solution you choose from the Solutions box. The
inconsistencies are then re-evaluated and the dialog box is updated.

Consistency Criteria Tab

All of the properties that are compared by consistency checking and copied across
this connection by propagation are shown on these tabs. The information shown here
is very similar to the information shown on the Consistency tab of the Rule
Properties dialog in the Rule Manager. Open the Consistency Check dialog box
by selecting Edit > Consistency Check.

Consistency Criteria – This list view shows all of the properties to be compared and
copied at this relationship. These consistency criteria come from the rules that apply
to this relationship. The consistency criteria for each rule are originally specified
within the Rule Manager. The name of the source rule is shown in the first column.
The remaining columns are the same as shown in the Consistency tab of the Rule
Properties dialog box in Rule Manager. Single selection mode is supported.

Item 1 - Displays the inconsistency, item type, and item tag for the first item that is
connected by the active relationship. When the Consistency Check dialog box first
appears, all items involved in the inconsistency are selected.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 219

Consistency Checking

Relationship - If there are multiple relationship indicators at the same location, all of
them are loaded into the Consistency Check dialog box. Each relationship indicator
is assigned a number. The numbers are loaded into the drop-down list on the
Relationship control. You can review each one individually by selecting from the
entries in the drop-down list.

Item 2 - Displays the inconsistency, item type, and item tag for the second item that
is connected by the active relationship. When the Consistency Check dialog box
first appears, all items involved in the inconsistency are selected.

Highlight item 1 - Place a check mark in the check box to highlight the item in the
drawing. This helps you to quickly locate the selected object. By default, this option
is not selected.

Highlight item 2 - Place a check mark in the check box to highlight the item in the
drawing. This helps you to quickly locate the selected object. By default, this option
is not selected.

Rule Name - Displays the name of the rule.

Item 1 Property - Displays the name of an Item 1 property to be copied and/or

compared is displayed in this column. Only those properties that are listed are copied
across the relationship (propagated) and compared to the value in the related item
(consistency checked).

Copy - The copy action to be performed is displayed in this column. This column
controls how the property value is propagated when a property value is changed. The
following table describes the possible values and their meanings.
Copy Action Copy Action
At Property Modification
Symbol Name
None None The property is not propagated across this relationship.
The value from Item 1 is copied to Item 2 during propagation
-> Copy 1 to 2 if Null
but only if the current value on Item 2 is Null.
The value from Item 2 is copied to Item 1 during propagation
<- Copy 2 to 1 if Null
but only if the current value on Item 1 is Null.
The value can be copied in either direction during propagation
<--> Copy Bi-directional if Null
but only if the current value on the target item is Null.
-> Copy 1 to 2 Always The value from Item 1 is copied to Item 2 during propagation.
<- Copy 2 to 1 Always The value from Item 2 is copied to Item 1 during propagation.
The value can be copied in either direction during propagation.
<--> Copy Bi-directional Always

Compare - Displays how the property values from Items 1 and 2 are compared. The
comparison occurs whenever any property on either item is changed. The following
table describes the possible values and their meanings
Comparison Operator Meaning
None No comparison

220 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Consistency Checking

= Equal
< Less than
<= Less than or equal to
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to
<> Not equal
Item 2 Property - Displays the name of an Item 2 property to be copied and/or
compared. Typically, this property name is the same as the Item 1 Property. However,
there are some cases where the property names are different. This property must have
the same data type as the property listed for Item 1.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 221

Calling Item Tag Validation

Calling Item Tag Validation

The ItemTag Validation project is saved as ItemTag.dll and performs calculations
and validations for unique tag checking, automatic tag generation, and tag
reformatting. This project generates unique Item Tag values, maintains consistency
between the Item Tag value and the properties used in its calculation, and also
removes any trailing or embedded spaces (only for properties included in the item
tag). Validation, in addition to checking the active project for existing item tags, also
checks for duplicate item tags in the project environment.

The ItemTag Validation project deals specifically with the following item types:
instrument loops, instruments, pipe runs, equipment components, signal runs with a
plant item type pipe run (hydraulic, connect to process, and so forth), equipment
(other equipment, exchangers, mechanical equipment, and vessels) and nozzles. This
project disregards all other item types.

Property validation is triggered when any property that comprises the Item Tag value
is added or modified. Calculation can be triggered by the Item Tag property for any
of the items shown in the tables below.

The following tables list item types that are validated or calculated by the ItemTag
Validation project, and the database tables and column names where modifications
trigger calculation and validation.

Legend:

Italics: Required for checking item tag uniqueness.

Bold Italics: Required for the item tag, but can be generated automatically.

Instrument
Instrument Type Modifier Measured Variable Code Tag Sequence
Item Tag Structure
Number Loop Tag Suffix Tag Suffix
(Instrument Type Modifier)(Measured Variable Code)-(Tag
Format
Sequence Number) (Loop Tag Suffix)(Tag Suffix)
Instrument Loop
Item Tag Structure Instrument Loop Function Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix
Format (Instrument Loop Function)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)
Pipe Run
Item Tag Structure Unit Code Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix Fluid Code
(Unit Code)(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)-(Operating Fluid
Format
Code)
Equipment
Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix
Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)
Equipment

222 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Calling Item Tag Validation

Component
Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix
Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)
Nozzle
Item Tag Structure Tag Prefix Tag Sequence Number Tag Suffix
Format (Tag Prefix)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag Suffix)
Signal Runs (Plant
Item Type Pipe
Run)
Unit Code Operating Fluid Code Tag Sequence NumberTag
Item Tag Structure
Suffix
Unit Code(Operating Fluid Code)-(Tag Sequence Number)(Tag
Format
Suffix)

With the automatic item tag generation feature, the next available number will be
selected from the Options Manager, and the values in Options Manager will be
incremented to reflect the change.

If you choose to input the Tag Seq No information in the field, SmartPlant P&ID
checks for duplicate values when the item tag is generated. If an item tag already
exists with that value, you are prompted either to create a unique value or to allow the
duplication.

Equipment
When you define the Tag Prefix property for equipment in a P&ID, the calculation
program automatically creates the next Tag Seq No and formats the values together
to generate the Item Tag property for the item.

Nozzles
Nozzle numbers are generated per equipment item and tag prefix. When you define
the Tag Prefix property for a nozzle in a P&ID, the calculation program
automatically starts with a Tag Seq No of 1 and formats the values together with Tag
Suffix to generate the Item Tag property for the item. The Item Tag is unique with
respect to the Tag Prefix and Tag Seq No properties. Each unique prefix will start
the numbering at 1. For example, if you If you assign nozzles with a Tag Prefix of N
and then assign a manway (which is also a nozzle) a Tag Prefix of M, those that have
a prefix of M will start numbering on that piece of equipment with a 1.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 223

Calling Item Tag Validation

Piping
When you define the Fluid Code property for a line, the calculation program
generates the Tag Sequence Number and formats the value together with the Unit
Code, Tag Seq No, and Fluid Code to generate the Item Tag property item.

224 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Calling Item Tag Validation

Off-Page Connectors
When an off-page connector is placed in a drawing, the OPC Tag is automatically
generated based on the next available sequence number from the Options Manager.
The off-page connector‘s match is automatically placed in the stockpile with the same
OPC Tag.

Instrument Loops
When you define the Tag Suffix property for the loop, the calculation program will
automatically generate the Tag Sequence Number and format the value together
with the Measured Variable and Type Modifier to generate the Item Tag property.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 225

Using Piping Specification Access

Using Piping Specification Access

The Piping Specification utility works with PDS 3D or SmartPlant 3D to validate the
piping materials class with the temperatures, pressures, and diameters assigned to the
pipe run and to search commodity codes and fabrication categories for piping
components. The database tables and library files in the 3D product provide source
information for the validation and search. The service limits validation and automatic
commodity code lookup can be disabled simultaneously using a switch in Options
Manager. For more information about modifying the PipeSpec settings, see Options
Manager Help.

In Data Dictionary Manager, the ValidateNomDiam.ForeignCalc program ID,

which is assigned to the Nominal Diameter property, starts the Piping Specification
utility and triggers the commodity code and fabrication category lookups when a
nominal diameter is changed. For more information about assigning program IDs, see
Data Dictionary Manager Help.

Notes:
Error messages are placed in the PipeSpecError.log file in the directory
assigned to the TEMP environment variable. Error messages help you identify
the cause of failure when the utility does not complete the tasks as expected.
For example, if minimum requirements are not met for the lookup, the missing
properties are listed in the log file.

The ServiceLimits.log file contains any errors encountered during the Service
Limit Validation process, which runs as part of the PipeSpec Utility.

PDS 3D Files Used For PipeSpec

pd schema - pdtable_102 table

ra schema - pdtable_201 and pdtable_202 tables

library files - us_pjstb.l, us_pjstb.l.r, and us_pjstb.l.t

.dll files - PipeSpec.dll, pdpjs.dll, pdpjsx.dll, and ValidateServiceLimits.dll

226 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Piping Specification Access

Performing Service Limits Validation

The Piping Specification utility verifies that the temperatures and pressures assigned
to a pipe run comply with the service limits associated with the selected Piping
Materials Class. In continuous validation mode, which is activated by assigned
settings in Options Manager, this verification occurs each time that you modify either
the Piping Materials Class or a temperature–pressure pair in the process case data of
the pipe run. The Service Limits validation requires at least one complete
temperature-pressure pair from among design, alternate design, operating, and
alternate operating cases. If any temperature-pressure pair violates the service limits
of the selected Piping Materials Class, a warning displays the appropriate pairs. This
warning appears in the design software by appending an error string to the name of
the PMC.

Performing Commodity Code and Fabrication

Category Look Up
The Piping Specification utility looks up the Commodity Code and Fabrication
Category properties of inline piping components. In the continuous validation mode,
this lookup occurs each time the Piping Materials Class or any of the four case Max
temperatures (Design, Alternate Design, Operating, and Alternate Operating) are
modified on the pipe run. Validation also occurs each time the Option Code or
Nominal Diameter of the component is modified. If the modification occurs on a
property of a piping component, then the lookup is restricted to that particular
component, but if the modification occurs on a property of a pipe run, then the lookup
encompasses every piping component on that run.

The minimum requirements to cause a lookup are that the piping component must be
in a pipe run, that the PMC of the pipe run must be populated and comply with
service limits, and that the nominal diameter of the piping component must be
specified. If the PMC is assigned but does not comply with the service limits, then the
Commodity Code property displays an error message.

The PipeSpec utility uses process case temperatures of the run during the commodity
code lookup only if the code for that component has a maximum temperature limit
value in the 3D database. For example, in PDS 3D, a value of -9999 for maximum
temperature in pdtable_202 indicates a null value, and the process case temperatures
on the pipe run are ignored for the lookup. If a maximum temperature exists for that
component, then the lookup insures this value is larger than all of the process case
temperatures assigned to the pipe run in which the piping component resides.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 227

Using Piping Specification Access

Note:
The units for the PDS 3D maximum temperature are those specified in
Options Manager.

If any temperature values for the pipe run are unspecified, then a value of zero Deg-K
is assumed for each of the unspecified temperatures. If multiple records are obtained
in the lookup, then the utility returns a commodity code only if all of the records have
the same code value. If not, an error is recorded in the error-log file with the
appropriate message.

The Fabrication Category property of inline piping components is a select-listed

property in SmartPlant P&ID. A relationship between the fabrication category and the
commodity name can be defined in the 3D databases. The Commodity Name is a
unique name for every symbol. In PDS 3D, this unique name is the AABBCC Code
property. SmartPlant symbols are assigned the same AABBCC Code properties in
Catalog Manager.

Similarly, the Option Code property is a select list of text values in SmartPlant
P&ID, while it is a set of code numbers or indices in PDS 3D. Short Value for the
Option Code select list contains the PDS 3D indices corresponding to the appropriate
Option Code text in SmartPlant P&ID. The PipeSpec utility uses the entries in the
Short Value box of the Option Code list to obtain the Option Code used in the PDS
3D database tables.

Assign a Piping Materials Class to a Pipe Run Using

PipeSpec
Note:

The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and
program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager,
respectively.

1. Select the pipe run.

2. Select the Piping Materials Class property for the pipe run in the Properties
Window.

3. Click the Calc button .

4. On the Piping Specifications dialog box, choose the appropriate PMC from the
list and click OK.

228 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Piping Specification Access

Notes:

Based on the chosen PMC and other assigned properties, such as Nominal
Diameter, Maximum Design Pressure, Maximum Design Temperature,
and so forth, the PipeSpec utility copies properties and checks limits in the
entire run, including inline components.

If you subsequently assign nominal diameters to inline valves or other

components, SmartPlant P&ID assigns commodity codes and fabrication
categories to them that correspond to the PMC of the pipe run and the
specifications in your 3D databases. If you choose a diameter, for instance,
that does not exist for the assigned PMC, then the commodity code property
becomes Not In Spec.

If you choose temperature-pressure limits for process cases that do not agree
with the assigned PMC, then the error Service Limits Error is added to the
PMC for the run.

Given the appropriate settings in Options Manager and Data Dictionary

Manager, you can manually assign commodity codes to inline components,
and the PipeSpec utility looks up accepted diameters and validates the
assignment.

Assign a Commodity Code to a Piping Component

Using PipeSpec
Note:

The PipeSpec utility is not available unless the appropriate settings and
program IDs are assigned in Options Manager and Data Dictionary Manager,
respectively.

1. Select an inline component that belongs to a pipe run whose piping material class
has been defined.

2. In the Properties window, define the Nominal Piping Diameter property for the
component.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 229

Using Piping Specification Access

Notes:

You can verify that a commodity code and fabrication category has been
assigned in the Properties window, or you can open the error log,
PipeSpecError.log, if properties have not been assigned as expected.

If continuous validation is turned on for the PipeSpec utility, then a pipe run
with temperature-pressure limits that do not agree with its PMC produces the
error Error in PMC in the commodity code for an inline component

With continuous validation, not only is the commodity code defined

automatically, but so is the Fabrication Category property for the inline
components, given that the relationship exists in the 3D databases.

Adding or changing the option code can change the commodity code, if the
relationship is defined in your 3D database.

If continuous validation is not activated but other appropriate settings and

program IDs are assigned, you can still click the Calc button for the
Commodity Code property and choose a code. However this does not verify
that the component agrees with a piping specification.

230 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Insulation Specifications

Using Insulation Specifications

The complex process plants of today require the use of extreme temperatures, both
hot and cold, to manufacture the products that you need. To make the plants energy
efficient and economical and to provide safety to workers, the use of insulation is
required. Over the years, company standards have been developed that dictate the
type and thickness of insulation based on temperature and other operating factors.
These standards make it feasible for the design software to select the proper
insulation required and automatically enter it into the database. This practice insures
proper design and speeds up the design process by freeing users from the laborious
and error-prone task of entering property data.

Detailed insulation thickness calculations are necessary for each pipeline and piece of
equipment in a plant. However, since insulation typically comes in a standard
thickness, companies commonly generate tables of data that match the thickness
required versus temperature and diameter. Different tables are generated for different
conditions, for example, personnel protection or energy conservation. SmartPlant®
P&ID Insulation Specification Manager provides users with a way to enter their table
data such that it is electronically stored so that the software can access the data as
required. In other words, the software does the table look-ups for you, so you do not
spend valuable time looking through stacks of insulation tables.

Insulation Specification Access

In SmartPlant P&ID, you can use Insulation Specification Access to select the
Insulation Spec for Piping and/or Equipment. For Piping, the software uses the
Insulation Temperature, Insulation Specification, and Pipe Nominal Diameter
combined with the selected specification to retrieve an Insulation Thickness, Type
and Density from the lookup table. For Equipment, the software uses the Insulation
Temperature and Insulation Purpose combined with the Specification to retrieve an
Insulation Thickness, Type, and Density from the lookup table.

If the user specifies an Insulation Nominal Diameter, then the calculation will ignore
the Pipe Run Nominal Diameter and use Insulation Nominal Diameter property for
the lookup.

If you have already specified other insulation properties, such as Insulation Type or
Insulation Purpose, then when you click the calculation button for the Insulation Spec
property, it will display a list that contains only those insulation specifications that
agree with the properties already chosen; nonetheless, you can choose a specification
from the All list. Selecting a spec from the All list will change the Insulation Purpose
to match that defined by the Spec.

Normally, when using the insulation lookup function, the software will determine an
insulation thickness. A property tracks whether the software or an individual user set

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 231

Using Insulation Specifications

an insulation thickness with an attribute displayed in the property grid called

Insulation Thk Source. If the user decides to override the thickness provided by the
software, SmartPlant P&ID will change the source property to User.

The insulation specifications are stored in a file with an .isl extension. The delivered
file is called InsulationSpec.isl. A pointer to this file is located in the Options
Manager > Settings.

Assign an Insulation Specification

1. Select the item, Equipment or Pipe; you want to add an Insulation Specification
to.

2. Select Insulation Spec in the Properties Window.

3. Select the Calculation button.

4. On the Insulation Spec dialog box, choose a specification from the either the
Matching or the All lists.

Notes:

If you have already specified other insulation properties, such as Insulation

Type or Insulation Purpose, then the Matching list contains only those
insulation specifications that agree with the properties already chosen;
nonetheless, you can choose a specification from the All list.

If you assign a heat tracing to an item before you assign insulation properties,
your choices of insulation properties and specifications are restricted.

5. Select OK.

232 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Generating Reports

Generating Reports
SmartPlant P&ID reports allow you to retrieve information from the database and
display the data as formatted output. Each report consists of a Microsoft Excel
workbook and a report definition which specifies which data will be collected and
how the data will be organized in the workbook. Reports are based on specific item
types such as equipment, nozzle, instrument, etc.

Several default reports and templates are delivered with the software but you can also
create your own, fully customized reports, either using one of the existing templates
or starting with a blank template. You can always create customized reports for your
own personal use but you must have the proper permissions, set in SmartPlant
Engineering Manager, to create plant reports for all users to see and use. For more
information on how to create customized reports, see SmartPlant P&ID Help,
Generating Reports.

Reports in SmartPlant P&ID can be generated either from the Reports menu in the
modeler window or from the View menu in the Engineering Data Editor. When
generating reports from the Reports menu in the modeler window you can only list
items in the current drawing or drawing stockpile. When you generate a report from
the Engineering Data Editor, you can customize your report output to include items in
other drawings or in the plant stockpile.

Note:

Microsoft Excel must be installed on your computer in order to generate and

display reports.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 233

Generating Reports

The Reports Menu

Choosing Reports from the main menu allows you to create new reports, edit or
delete existing report templates or generate reports. Unless you have proper privileges
for plant reports, you can only create, edit, delete and generate reports for your own
personal use. These reports will be available using the My Reports command. With
read-only privileges to the Plant Reports you can generate Plant Reports and with full
control access to the Plant Reports you can create, edit or modify plant reports.

Generating a report from the Reports menu

The Plant Reports dialog displays when you select Reports > Plant Reports from
the Reports menu.

234 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Generating Reports

This window displays all delivered plant-level reports associated with the active plant
in alphabetical order. The location of these report templates is defined in Options
Manager. To generate a report, you select the report from the list and specify the
available options. A similar dialog will display when you select Reports > My
Reports from the Reports menu, listing only custom reports you have created under
My Reports.

Report using: Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. The options
that appear in this area depend on whether you have selected any items in your
drawing.

Current Selection — generates a report containing the items currently selected in

your drawing. This option is not available if nothing is selected. Include items in
drawing stockpile is grayed out and not available when you choose Current
Selection.
Entire drawing — generates a report about all items in your drawing.

Include items in drawing stockpile - Allows you to specify whether or not you want
to include items that reside in the drawing stockpile. This option is only available
when you generate a report for the entire drawing.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 235

Generating Reports

Generate a report for an active drawing

1. In the Drawing view, select the items you want to include in the report. If you
select no items the software will report on all items in the drawing.
2. Click Reports > Plant Reports to display the Plant Reports dialog.
3. Select one of the delivered reports from the list.
4. In the Report using area, select Current selection or Entire drawing.
5. Select or deselect Include items in drawing stockpile if applicable.
6. Click OK.
The software will generate the report, open Excel, and display the report file. The
reports are saved in the directory specified in the Tools > Options dialog, Files tab,
section My Reports. If you have generated the report before and a file with the same
name already exists in the directory a Save Output As dialog will display and allow
you to rename the file or choose a different location.

236 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Generating Reports

Reporting from the EDE

Reports can be generated from within the Engineering Data Editor but they cannot be
created or edited from here. You need to have the proper privileges to generate Plant
Reports but you can generate custom reports located under My Reports any time.
Reports generated from the EDE can include items in the current drawing, current
drawing stockpile, plant stockpile, and/or other drawings.

Generating a report from the EDE

The following dialog displays when you select View > Plant Reports from the View
menu.

This window displays all delivered plant-level reports associated with the active plant
in alphabetical order. The location of these report templates is defined in Options
Manager. To generate a report, you select the report from the list and specify the
available options. A similar dialog will display when you select Reports > My
Reports from the Reports menu, listing only custom reports you have created under
My Reports.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 237

Generating Reports

Report using: Displays options for specifying the scope of your report. The options
that appear in this area depend on whether you have selected any items in your
drawing.
Current Selection — Generates a report containing the items currently selected
in the EDE. If you do not select this option the software will report on all items
displayed. This option is only available if you have selected items in the EDE.
All items in the Engineering Data Editor — Generates a report about all items
in the EDE.

Generate a report for all equipment in the plant

1. In the Engineering Data Editor, select Equipment from the drop down list.
2. Display all equipment in the plant. Select the Active Drawing, Active Drawing
Stockpile, Stockpile, and Other Drawings buttons.

3. Select several equipment items (rows) in the EDE.

4. Select Plant Reports from the EDE View menu.
5. Select the Equipment List report from the list.
6. In the Report using area, select Current selection or Entire drawing.
7. Click OK.
The software will generate the report, open Excel, and display the report file. The
reports are saved in the directory specified in the Tools > Options dialog, Files tab,
section My reports. If you have generated the report before and a file with the same
name already exists in the directory a Save Output As dialog will display and allow
you to rename the file or choose a different location.

Notes:

Before running the Line List report, verify that every line in the selection has
an Item Tag. Lines that do not have an item tag will not be listed individually
in the report.

To generate From and To data for the Line List or Pipe Run List reports, run
macros PrintFromToDataForActiveSheet or
PrintFromToDataForAllSheets.

238 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Printing Drawings

Printing Drawings
You can print your drawings on many different devices ranging from dot matrix
printers to laser printers and plotters. Except for the color settings and a few special
effects, your drawing prints exactly as it appears in the Drawing view. This
stipulation applies to special settings like the display of claimed items, inconsistency
indicators, or filtered items.

Note:

Zero length pipe runs will print. For example, when a reducer is connected to
a nozzle, the zero length pipe run between these symbols will print. Zero
length pipe runs will not print if you print your drawing using Drawing
Manager.

Printing the Active Drawing

As you work on a drawing, you can send a copy of it to a specified printer, plotter, or
file. The currently active view will print (Primary, Typical, Both). You can click the
Print command on the File menu to do the following:

Print an entire drawing or specific views from a drawing.

Set printing options, such as the range of sheets or number of copies to
print.
The software supports plotting using standard Windows plotting capabilities. It also
supports pen plotters, subject to the limitations of the device driver. Items look the
same on the screen and in the printed drawing. However, the fonts you select can
affect the match between what you see on the screen and what appears on the printed
page. Three kinds of fonts affect your work: scalable fonts, printer fonts, and screen
fonts. Use scalable fonts, such as TrueType® fonts, to make sure that what you see on
the screen is what appears on the printed page. If you use printer fonts, you must have
a corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If each
screen font you use has a matching printer font, the screen display of the drawing
closely matches the printed drawing.

Print Command
The File > Print sends a copy of the active drawing to a specified plotter, printer, or
file. Options are available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies, and
other printing characteristics. Selecting File > Print also opens the Print dialog box.

Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on
installing a printer, see the printer documentation.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 239

Printing Drawings

Print Dialog Box

Controls how a drawing is printed. This dialog box opens when you click File >
Print on the menu bar.

Printer:

Name - Specifies the printer you want to use. You can select from a list of all
the available configured printers. The information below the Name box
applies to the selected printer. The printer you select in the Name box is the
default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a
different printer.

Properties - Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box, which

allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings.

Status - Describes the state of the selected printer, such as, busy or idle. This
area is read-only.

Type - Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.

240 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Printing Drawings

Where - Identifies the printer path, printer port, queue name, or physical
location of the currently selected printer. This area is read-only.

Comment - Displays any comments you entered during printer configuration.

This area is read-only.

Print to file - Stores your drawing in a file with extension .prn instead of
sending it to a printer. The Print to File dialog box appears when you select
the Print to file option on the Print dialog box and then click OK. You select
a file name and location for the print file in the Print to File dialog box. Then
you can print from a computer that does not have the application installed or
print to a printer other than the one you currently have configured.

Print Range:

Drawing - Prints your entire drawing.

View - Activates the All and Active check boxes so you can then define the
view or views to print.

Selection - Prints the user-defined area. When you select this option, the
Settings button at the bottom of the Print dialog box is unavailable.

All - Prints each defined view associated with the drawing.

Active - Prints only the active view.

Options:

Fit to page - Prints your entire drawing on one page.

Print watermark - Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background.

Print black and white - Prints the drawing in black and white.

Copies:

Number of copies - Displays the number of copies you want to print. Type the
number or use the scroll buttons to specify a number.

Collate - Prints the copies in proper binding order.

Settings - Opens the Settings dialog box, which allows you to view and edit the scale
and origin of your print area. This button is disabled when the Selection option in the
Print range group is selected.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 241

Printing Drawings

Settings Dialog Box

Specifies the area you want to print. This dialog box opens when you click Settings
on the Print dialog box.

Scale:

Best fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer
paper for the configured device.

Manual scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during
printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and
you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears to be 1 cm by 1
cm on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale,
you can set the Paper length option to 1 and the Design length option to 1.

o Paper length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want
to print with respect to the Design length option.
o Design length - Specifies a design length (size of the printed graphic)
with respect to the Paper length option.
Origin:

Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If
you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom
left.
X origin - Sets a shift in the x-direction from the origin.

Y origin - Sets a shift in the y-direction from the origin.

242 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Printing Drawings

Preview - Displays dynamically how the graphic prints on the sheet as you change
other options on the dialog box.

Printing Multiple Drawings

Rather than printing drawings one-by-one from within SmartPlant P&ID, Drawing
Manager allows you to print more than one drawing at a time. You can select
drawings for printing from any number of units or areas in a plant structure to be
placed into the print queue and can specify printing options, such as watermark,
whether to print inconsistencies, and drawing orientation, for the entire group of
selected drawings. You also have the capability in Drawing Manager to schedule
batch printing for a later time or at regular intervals by using the Schedule option on
the Print dialog box.

While you can print just one drawing at a time from within Drawing Manager, the
Print command in Drawing Manager does not have all the single-print capabilities of
the Print command in SmartPlant P&ID. For instance, Drawing Manager only prints
an entire drawing; whereas, in SmartPlant P&ID, you can print only a selection or a
view inside one drawing.

Print Command
The File > Print from Drawing Manager opens the Print dialog box where you can
specify options for printing your drawings.

Print Dialog Box

The print dialog box controls how a drawing is printed. This dialog box opens when
you click File > Print from Drawing Manager.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 243

Printing Drawings

Printer:

Name - Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list
of all the available configured printers. The information below the Name box
applies to the selected printer. The printer that you select in the Name box is
the default printer for the rest of the current design session until you specify a
different printer.

Properties - Opens the Printer Document Properties dialog box, which

allows you to specify page setup and other printer settings specific to the
selected printer.

Status - Describes the state of the selected printer, for example, busy or idle.
This area is read-only.

Types - Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.

Where - Identifies the printer path, printer port, queue name, or physical
location of the currently selected printer. This area is read-only.

Print Filter:

Typicals only – If this box is checked, only items in the typical view of the
drawings will be printed. If the box is not checked, items in the primary view

244 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Printing Drawings

of the drawing will be printed. It is not possible to print both views of a

drawing from Drawing Manager.

Apply display set - Associates symbols to a filter that defines which symbols
to print. If not selected, then no filtering is applied to the drawing and the
entire drawing prints.

Active display set - Displays the selected display set. You can click Browse
to select a defined display set.

Options:

Fit to page - Prints your entire drawing on one page.

Print black and white - Prints the drawing in black and white.

Print watermark - Prints a faint graphic in the drawing background.

Print inconsistency markers - Causes inconsistency markers in the graphic

to appear on the printed copy.

Settings - Opens the Settings dialog box, which allows you to view and edit
the scale and origin of your print area.

Preview - Allows you to see how the image will look when printed. The
image displays on your monitor.

Schedule - Opens the Schedule Task Wizard, which allows you to specify
options for printing the selected drawings at a later time or on a regular
interval.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 245

Importing Drawing Data

Importing Drawing Data

There are several ways you can import data into SmartPlant P&ID. You can import
data and items into the database using reports and other files. SmartSketch files can
be imported into SmartPlant P&ID using the SmartPlant Migrator wizard. Also, you
can also populate or redefine pipe run properties by importing an Aspen Zyqad
stream data file. During the import process, you can assign the stream and its
associated engineering data to the pipe run.

The log file for import activities is called SPImport.log and is saved to your local
Temp directory.

Relationships between items cannot be imported, only items and their properties.

Import Data File Command

The File > Import > Data File allows you to import data and items into the database
from reports and other files.

Using Reports to Import Items into the Stockpile

You can use the Equipment List and the Pipe Run List to import new items into the
stockpile. This capability allows you to define values for an item that does not yet
exist in the database. Both of these reports have hidden columns that store some key
information that is necessary for importing this information.

Also, you can use a report to import information for items that already exist in the
database. You must first run the report, add or edit property values for the items
returned in the report, and then import the items back into the drawing. The property
values for the items are updated. Valid reports are Equipment List, Equipment Nozzle
List, and Pipe Run List.

Modify a Pump by Importing a SmartPlant P&ID Report into

the Stockpile
1. Place a pump in a drawing and assign an item tag, for example, P-100A.

2. Run the Equipment List report.

3. In the resulting report, change the value in the Item Tag cell (for example, change
P-100A to P-101D) by highlighting the last column in the report and the column

246 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Importing Drawing Data

right next to it, then clicking Format > Column > Unhide. The path name of the
associated symbol is available in column T. Columns Y, Z, and AA display the
Tag Prefix, Tag Sequence Number, and Tag Suffix properties, respectively. In
this example, these should be updated to P, 101, and D, respectively.

4. Select File > Save.

5. Select File > Close.

6. In SmartPlant P&ID, click File > Import > Data file.

7. Browse to the Equipment List report that you just created and modified.

8. Select Open.

Import Aspen Basic Engineering (Zyqad) Stream

Data
1. Select a pipe run from the drawing to display the Properties window for the pipe
run.

Note:

If the Properties window is not open, you can click Edit > Properties
after you select the pipe run.

2. Select the Calc button next to the Stream No. property to display the Stream
Number dialog box.

3. Select the Browse button and select the Aspen Zyqad stream data .txt, .xls, or
.xml file from the appropriate folder.

4. Select the Stream ID list and select a Stream ID.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 247

Importing Drawing Data

5. Select OK to populate the Property Window with the selected Stream ID.

Populate the Stockpile from a Spreadsheet

1. Select File > Import > Data File.

2. Browse to the location of your spreadsheet, select it, and select Open.

The status bar displays the progress of the import activity.

You can populate the stockpile with items from Aspen Zyqad exported
spreadsheets and some SmartPlant reports.

3. If Errors are encountered during the import process the Import Log dialog box
will be displayed. If no errors are encountered the Import Log dialog box will
not be displayed but may be found the ~\temp folder.

248 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Importing Drawing Data

Notes:

If a format change is made to an exported Aspen Zyqad report, you must

make modifications to the import code to accommodate the changed report
layout.

Aspen Zyqad spreadsheets in either Microsoft Excel or XML format are

supported. These spreadsheets include the Vessel Equipment List, Pump
Equipment List, and Heat Exchanger Equipment.

Stockpile items that come from importing Aspen Zyqad data can be easily
updated by re-importing a data file. Previously imported items, whether they
remain in the stockpile or have already been placed in the drawing, are
updated with data from the newly imported file.

Importing Aspen Zyqad XML data files allows greater flexibility when
importing data into the software. All three reports, Equipment, Pumps, and
Exchangers, are included in a single XML report so that only one file has to
be imported.

You can use the Equipment List, Pipe Run List, and Equipment Nozzle List
Reports from SmartPlant to define properties of items already placed in the
drawing, too. Items must have an assigned item tag prior to definition or
modification of properties. In addition, these reports can create occurrences of
items in the stockpile.

See the SmartPlant P&ID Programmer's Guide Help file for more
information on import code and other importing parameters. Click Help >
Programming with SmartPlant P&ID.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 249

Using Drawing Revisions

Using Drawing Revisions

You can create revisions for drawings consisting of major and minor revisions and
include the revision information in the drawing title block if desired. You can also
associate a version with the latest revision if you need to archive drawings for
viewing or comparing. You can compare two archived drawings or you can compare
an archived drawing with the current drawing.

Notes:

The combination of the major and minor revision values must be unique in the
plant.

When working in an integrated environment, when you select the New

Revision command, the software opens the SmartPlant Foundation Revisions
dialog box instead of the SmartPlant P&ID New Revision dialog box. If you
want to associate a version with a new revision in an integrated environment,
you must select the drawing and run the Revisions > Associate Version
command after creating the revision.

New Revision Command

The Revisions > New Revision command opens the New Revision dialog box,
allowing you to create a new revision for the selected drawings and to enter values for
the revision properties. At the time you create a Revision you can also associate a
version with a new revision.

New Revision Dialog Box

The New Revision Dialog Box allows you to enter values of properties pertaining to
the creation of a new revision that applies to one or more drawings. This dialog box
opens when you select the drawings and click Revisions > New Revision.

Alphabetized Button– Displays drawing properties alphabetically. This button acts

as a toggle and is available when properties are displayed categorically.

Categorized Button– Displays drawing properties in categories. This button acts as

a toggle and is available when properties are displayed alphabetically.

(Properties and Values List) – Displays a list of shipped properties used for the
revision. You can specify additional properties for display on this dialog box by
defining them in the Data Dictionary Manager. Note that Major Revision is a
mandatory property and that the combination of the Major Revision and Minor
Revision values must be unique in the plant or project.

250 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Drawing Revisions

Associate version – On clicking OK, opens the New Version dialog box, which
allows you to create a new version and associate it with the revision.

OK – Generates the new revision, and if specified, an associated version. This

command only becomes available when you enter a value for Major Revision.

Revision History Command

The Revisions > Revision History opens the Revision History dialog box, which
displays a record of the revisions of the selected drawing.

Revision History Dialog Box

The Revision History Dialog Box lists all available revisions of a drawing. You can
open this dialog box by clicking Revisions > Revision History.

History
Lists all the revisions of the drawing in the current plant.

Major Revision – Indicates the number or other designation of the major revision.
This is a required property, so a value will always appear in this column.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 251

Using Drawing Revisions

Minor Revision – Indicates the number or other designation of the minor revision.
This is not a required property, so a value may or may not appear in this column.

Revision Date – Shows the date on which the revision was created.

Approved By – Shows the name of the person who approved the revision.

Created By – Shows the name of the user who created the revision.

Checked By – Shows the name of the person who checked the revision.

Revision Properties – Opens the Revision Properties dialog box, allowing you to
view or edit all of the revision properties.

Associate Version – Opens the New Version dialog box, allowing you to create and
associate a new version with this revision. This option is only available for the last
revision.

Delete – Removes the selected drawing revision. To be able to delete revisions, you
must have appropriate permissions assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager. If
the revision has an associated version, the software deletes the version together with
the revision.

252 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Drawing Versions

Using Drawing Versions

Drawing versions allows you to create, compare, and recover versions of your
drawings. Using drawing versioning is helpful in the following situations.

Restoring a drawing after it has been deleted

Restoring a drawing after items have been deleted from the drawing

Restoring a drawing after making design errors

Archiving a drawing before making major design changes

Creating a New Version of a Drawing

The current state of a drawing and all associated data can be saved using the New
Version command. Previously saved drawing versions are available to be viewed,
compared, and fetched, if necessary. If drawing versions are saved on a regular basis,
the sequence of drawing versions becomes a sort of archive that shows the
development of the drawing.

Create a Version of a Drawing

1. From Drawing Manager, in the List view, select a drawing.

2. Select Revisions > New Version or right click and select Revisions > New
Version.

3. On the New Version dialog box, enter any comments that you want to attach to
the new version.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 253

Using Drawing Versions

4. Select OK to create the version.

5. Select View Log

************************* NewVersion *************************
04/29/2005 08:39:58 - INGRPPO\jrberggr Performed NewVersion.
Operation : NewVersion
Drawing : Lab5
Status : Failed. Error: Drawing may be currently opened or require a
recreate from database. Failed to create new version. Failed to create New
Version.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Operation : NewVersion
Drawing : 41-PI-0001
Status : Completed successfully.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Operation : NewVersion
Drawing : 38-PI-0001
Status : Completed successfully.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:

Click View Log on the Creating Version of Drawings dialog box to open
the log file and review notes on the version creation operation.

New Version skips open drawings, notes them in the log, and then
continues.

If no changes have been made to the drawing since the last version was
created, no new version is created.
************************* NewVersion
*************************
04/29/2005 08:43:33 - INGRPPO\jrberggr Performed NewVersion.

254 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Drawing Versions

Operation : NewVersion
Drawing : 38-PI-0001
Status :Nothing to do.
Use the Schedule button to create a task for creating drawing versions at a
later time or on a regular interval. Follow the instructions on the Schedule
Task Wizard.

Create Versions of All Drawings

1. In the Tree view, select the site or plant containing the drawings you want to
save versions of.

2. Select Revisions > Incremental New Versions.

3. Follow the steps and directions on the Schedule Task Wizard, and select
Finish to schedule the operation at another time or on a regular interval.

Note:

This procedure saves new versions of only those drawings whose time
stamp shows that they have changed since the last version was saved.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 255

Using Drawing Versions

Recovering Drawings
The following areas require special consideration with regard to saving new drawing
versions and how retrieving a drawing effects the actions that can occur in the Plant
between saving a version and retrieving it. These actions have serious implications
when recovering (using the Fetch Deleted Drawings command) a drawing. In all
drawing recovery activities, a log file is created in which you can review notes on any
recovery activity that you are undertaking.

Multiple Representations
After a drawing is recovered, there are situations where multiple representations of
piping and equipment items can spontaneously occur. For example, you place a piece
of equipment on drawing A and then you save a version of drawing A. After creating
a version of drawing A, you move the equipment from drawing A to the Plant
Stockpile and then to drawing B. When drawing A is retrieved, the following
message is added to the log file:
Item (item tag ItemTag, internal ID SP_ID) is being restored as a
multiple representation because another representation of the same
item was found in drawing Drawing Name.

Encountering this situation does not cause the retrieval to fail; the retrieval process
continues as normal.

If an equipment item already exists as a multiple representation in another drawing,

the following message is added to the log file:
Restoring multi representation item (item tag ItemTag, internal ID
SP_ID).

Encountering this situation does not cause the retrieval to fail; the retrieval process
continues as normal.

If other valid stockpile items are moved from drawing A to drawing B, the following
message is added to the log file:
Error! Item (item tag ItemTag, internal ID SP_ID) has been moved to
drawing Drawing Name.

To resolve this conflict, you must either delete the indicated item or restore the
indicated drawing first. If you delete the item, then the item can either be deleted to
the Plant Stockpile or deleted from the model. This error message is created for each
moved item, and the retrieval process quits without restoring the archive.

256 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Drawing Versions

Off Page Connectors (OPCs)

If you save a new version of a drawing that includes an OPC, and its mate is deleted
from the database afterward, both OPCs are restored to the drawing or drawing
stockpile, as appropriate, when the drawing is retrieved.

For example, an OPC is placed on a drawing A, its mate is placed on drawing B, and
both drawings saved in versions. When drawing A is retrieved, the OPC is restored to
drawing A, and the mate is placed in the Plant Stockpile. The mated OPC has the
same item tag as the OPC restored to drawing A. Once drawing B is retrieved, the
OPC mate of the OPC in drawing A is placed in drawing B and removed from the
Plant Stockpile.

Pipe and Signal Lines

If all the line runs belonging to a line are deleted from the model after a drawing
version is saved, the line is restored back to the database after the drawing is
recovered.

To restore a deleted line, Drawing Manager searches the database for a line that has
the same key property values as the line that is being restored. If such a line is found,
it is used as the line for the restored runs. If a suitable line is not found one is created
for the restored runs.

Plant Group Joins

Plant Group Joins, which relate items in plant groups, are restored from a version
only if the plant groups, such as the unit or area, exist in the current database.

For example, a piece of equipment belongs to a plant group and a drawing version is
saved. If the plant group is deleted and then the drawing is recovered, the equipment
is restored, but because the plant group does not exist, the Plant Group Join is not
restored.

If the plant item group is found in the archived drawing, but the Plant Group Join
does not exist in the current database, Drawing Manager restores the Plant Group
Join.

Plant Item Groups

Plant Item Groups placed in the drawing stockpile are considered part of the drawing;
therefore, Drawing Manager restores them to the drawing stockpile when the drawing
is recovered.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 257

Using Drawing Versions

Plant Item Groups that are moved to the Plant Stockpile after a drawing version has
been saved are restored back to the drawing stockpile when the drawing is recovered.
The software searches for the corresponding Plant Item Group in the saved stockpiles,
and if it is not found there, searches in the active database for the same.

Plant Item Group Joins

A Plant Item Group Join is a relationship created when an plant item, such as an
instrument or a piece of equipment, is linked to a Plant Item Group, such as an
instrument loop, a package, or the like. Plant Item Group Joins are saved as part of
the drawing version.

During a drawing recovery, if a Plant Item Group Join exists in the saved drawing
version, the software searches for the corresponding Plant Item Group in the archived
stockpiles. If the corresponding Plant Item Group is not found in those stockpiles, the
database is also searched.

If the Plant Item Group is found in the saved version, and the Plant Item Group Join is
not found in the database, then the Plant Item Group Join is restored. If the Plant Item
Group is not found in the saved stockpiles, the Plant Item Group and the Plant Item
Group Join are restored to the Plant Stockpile. If the Plant Item Group exists in the
current drawing stockpile, Drawing Manager updates the database to reflect the
archived Plant Item Group Join.

For example: An instrument is associated with a Loop, LP1, in the drawing stockpile
and a version is saved. Afterward, a new Loop, LP2, is placed in the drawing
stockpile and the instrument is associated with LP2. When the drawing is restored,
the Plant Item Group Join indicates a relationship between the instrument and LP1. If
LP1 has since been deleted from the drawing stockpile, it is restored to the drawing
stockpile. If LP2 exists in the current Plant Stockpile at the time of drawing recovery,
LP2 is left as is. However, if LP2 is in the drawing stockpile, Loop LP2 is deleted
from the database along with any other corresponding representations and histories of
Loop LP2.

Miscellaneous
If a drawing is deleted after a version is saved and a new drawing is created using the
same name and drawing number as the deleted drawing, retrieval of the deleted
drawing fails. Changing drawing properties, such as name, number, and so forth, after
saving a version of a drawing result in the original values being restored when the
drawing is recovered. If this situation occurs, the following message is added to the
log file:
Warning! Drawing drawing name1 has been renamed to new drawing name2.

258 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Drawing Versions

Drawing Manager changes the drawing back to its original name, drawing name1, in
the database. The original .pid file pathname\drawing name1 is also replaced. You
must delete the .pid file for pathname\drawing name2.

Notes:

You must have either site administrator or modify privileges to save versions
or recover drawings.

You cannot restore hierarchy items by using drawing recovery. For example,
if a unit is deleted, an archived drawing belonging to that unit can never be
retrieved

Recover a Version of a Drawing

1. In the List view, select the drawing that you want to recover.

2. Select Revisions > Version History or click the Version History button.

3. On the Show History dialog box, select the version of the drawing you want to
recall.

4. Select Fetch and enter comments on the Fetch Comments dialog box.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 259

Using Drawing Versions

5. On the message box, select Yes to confirm that you want to overwrite the current
version with the saved version you have selected.

6. Click View Log on the Fetching Drawings dialog box if you want to see notes
about this operation.

***************** FetchVersionFromOtherProject *****************

04/29/2005 09:13:03 - INGRPPO\jrberggr Performed
FetchVersionFromOtherProject.
Operation : FetchVersionFromOtherProject
Drawing : 38-PI-0001
Status : Completed successfully.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

260 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Using Drawing Versions

Note:

Be sure you are familiar with the ramifications of drawing recovery before
you undertake the operation. For more information, see Recovering Drawings.

Recover a Version of a Deleted Drawing

1. Select the appropriate plant level in the Tree view, and select Revisions > Fetch
Deleted Drawing.

2. On the Fetch Deleted Drawing dialog box, select the drawing you want to
retrieve.

3. Select OK to retrieve the drawing now or click Schedule to open the Schedule
Task Wizard, which allows you to schedule retrieval at a later time or on a
regular interval.

4. On the Fetching Deleted Drawing Status dialog box, select View Log to review
notes about this retrieval process.

Notes:

All the saved versions of the selected drawing are retrieved. You can view the
various versions by selecting the drawing in the List view and selecting
Revisions > Version History.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 261

Using Drawing Versions

If you retrieve a drawing that was new to your Plant, then the drawing icon for
a new drawing will be applied; otherwise, the drawing icon for a fetched
drawing is used in the List view.

262 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing

Manager
When more than one version of a drawing exists, the Compare command on the
Version History dialog box in Drawing Manager allows you to view two versions
side-by-side and examine their differences. You can compare two versions from
inside your own Plant or project database. Keep in mind that you can only compare a
drawing against a version of itself; that is, you cannot compare one drawing to
another drawing.

Differences between drawing versions are assigned to logical "change" groups, which
are listed on the Compare dialog box.

Differences also belong to one of two possible categories:

Data - Refers to a mismatch in the properties assigned to an item that exists in

both drawings, namely a change, addition, or deletion of a property in the
Properties window, in the Engineering Data Editor in SmartPlant P&ID, or
through automation.

Graphic - Refers to an item that has changed only in its graphical

representation in the design (for example, the item is moved or otherwise
graphically manipulated in the drawing).

The following differences are ignored: claim status, select list strings, linked or
embedded objects, symbology, and inconsistency indicators.

Every change grouping and every changed item is assigned a category, and if more
than one category applies (for instance, if you move an item and change one of its
properties) then the highest priority category is displayed. The order of priority, from
high to low, for the categories is Data then Graphic.

The two versions are displayed in two Drawing views, described only as left and
right. The relationship between the two views depends on whether you are comparing
two versions in your own database or comparing your version to a version in another
database.

If the two versions are in the active database, then the left-hand view is the
older version, and the right-hand view is the newer version. That is, they are
displayed in time-order from left to right.

If the two versions exist in different databases, you cannot be assured that
time-order is the logical order to display the versions; therefore, the right-hand
view is reserved for the version in your active Plant, and the left-hand view
belongs to the version in another database.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 263

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

The Compare dialog box in Drawing Manager is useful reviewing differences

between versions only. If you want to reconcile anything about the two versions you
review, then you must do so inside SmartPlant P&ID. The Compare and Refresh
command in SmartPlant P&ID exists for this purpose. If you started with the left-
hand drawing version and applied every change listed on the Compare dialog box,
then you would end with a drawing that is identical to the right drawing version.

Compare Versions of Drawings in Same Database

1. In Drawing Manager, in the List view, select the drawing.

2. Select Revisions > Version History.

3. In the drawing list on the Version History dialog box, select two versions of the
drawing.

4. Select Compare.

5. On the Compare dialog box, you can view the differences between the two
versions, but you cannot make changes to the designs. To change the design, you
must use SmartPlant P&ID.

Notes:

You can manipulate the views and navigate through the listed changes by
using the commands on the Compare dialog box toolbar. Each Drawing view
also has its own shortcut menu, which includes manipulation commands that
apply only to that view.

You can select an item in either Drawing view. The item is then located in the
appropriate group in the Change details list. If you select an item in the
Change details list, then you can use the Find in Drawings button on the
toolbar to locate the item in one or both Drawing views.

You can select an item in the Drawing view or in the Change details list.
Properties for that item appear in the Properties window. Selecting multiple
items is not possible on the Compare dialog box.

The following differences are ignored: claim status, select list strings, linked
or embedded objects, symbology, and inconsistency indicators.

You can only compare a drawing against a version of itself; that is, you cannot
compare one drawing to another drawing.

You can also compare versions when you are checking in a drawing.

264 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

If at any point you attempt to compare two versions that are actually identical
to each other, the Compare dialog box does not open and a confirmation
message alerts you as to why.

Compare Versions of Drawings in Separate

Databases

Version History Dialog Box

The Version History Dialog Box lists all available versions of a drawing. You can
compare two versions of the drawing, or view a version of the drawing without
opening SmartPlant P&ID, or fetch a version from the list. You can open this dialog
box by selecting Revisions > Version History or by selecting the History button on
the Fetch dialog box.

Revisions > Version History - Displays the version history of a drawing, provides
access to the Compare and Compare With commands for viewing changes between
drawing versions, and the View command, which allows you to view a drawing as
read-only without opening SmartPlant P&ID.

History - Lists all the versions of the drawing in the current plant or project.

Compare - Opens the Compare dialog box, allowing you to compare two versions in
the History list. This button is not available unless two versions are selected in the
list or if you open this dialog box by clicking History on the Fetch dialog box. Use
the Compare With button to compare one version to another version in the Plant.

Compare with - Opens the Compare With dialog box, allowing you to find a
drawing version in the Plant to compare to the drawing version you select in the

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 265

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

History list. The Compare With button is not available if you open this dialog box
by clicking History on the Fetch dialog box.

View - Opens the View dialog box, which displays a read-only view of the selected
drawing version without opening SmartPlant P&ID. You can manipulate the view or
select drawing items and review their properties.

Fetch - Opens the Fetch-Option dialog box. This button is available only if you have
selected one, and only one, version in the History list and that drawing is not the
current version. The Fetch button is not available if you open this dialog box by
clicking History on the Fetch dialog box.

Delete - Removes the selected drawing version. You must have the appropriate
permissions, assigned in SmartPlant Engineering Manager, to delete versions. You
cannot delete the current version of a drawing by using this button. However, you can
delete the current version of a drawing by using the Delete command on the Edit
menu on the main menu bar.

Compare Dialog Box

The Compare Dialog Box opens when you click Compare on the Version History
dialog box, displaying two versions of the same drawing, and identifying the
differences between them. At the top of each Drawing view, the Plant, the name of
the drawing, and the version is displayed explicitly. You can move the bars between
the different views according to your needs. If you double click on the divider
between the left and right Drawing views, the two views automatically same-size.

Note:

You cannot do anything else in Drawing Manager while this dialog box is
open.

266 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

Toolbar Commands
Apply to the Drawing views.

Compare Options - Opens the Compare Options dialog box, which

allows you to customize the colors that the various comparison states are
displayed in. That color-coding is then displayed in the status bar of the
Compare dialog box as a static reminder.

Print - Prints the entire Compare dialog contents. You can also select to
print either the left or right view by using the drop-down arrow to select either
Right View or Left View.

Generate Report - Opens Microsoft Excel and creates a report of the

differences between the compared versions. This report lists information
similar to what is contained in the Change Groups and Change Details areas
(number, identifier, catergory, etc).

Find in List - Zooms to the Change Groups or Change details list entry
that corresponds to an item you select in either Drawing view. Generally
speaking, if you select a drawing item that exists in the list, then the list
display automatically zooms to that entry.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 267

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

Find in Drawings - Manipulates the Drawing views so that the selected

element is listed in the Change details and the Change groups list is centered
in the appropriate Drawing view.

Note:

Selected items in the Change Group or Change Details areas will

only be identified in the drawing view if the item resides in the
currently displayed view (Primary, Typical, or Both).

Zoom Area - Enlarges the display of an area in one or both Drawing

views by allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the view.

Zoom In - Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in one or

both Drawing views.

Zoom Out - Reduces the display of items around a specified point in one
or both Drawing views.

Fit - Fits all visible items in one or both Drawing views.

Pan - Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific
point in one or both Drawing views in order to see other areas of the view by
dragging the pointer across the display.

Select - Activates the select tool.

Help - Opens Drawing Manager online Help.

Left Drawing View - Displays one version of your drawing. If you compare two
versions from different projects, the version that belongs to the other project appears
in the left-hand Drawing view. If you compare two versions from your active project,
then the older version appears in the left-hand Drawing view.

Right Drawing View - Displays the other version of your drawing. If you compare
two versions from different projects, the version that belongs to your active Drawing
Manager project appears in the right-hand Drawing view. If you compare two
versions from your active project, then the latest version appears in the right-hand
Drawing view.

A drop down list allows you to choose between Primary, Typical, and Both views of
the drawing for the Left and Right drawing view. Views can be chosen independently
for both versions of the drawing.

Properties Window - Displays two columns of properties for an item selected in a

Drawing view or in the Change details list. The left-hand and right-hand column
corresponds to the left-hand and right-hand Drawing views. If a deleted item is

268 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

selected (the item exists in left-hand view, but not the right-hand), the properties for
that item are listed in the left-hand column and the right-hand column is empty. If a
modified item is selected, values from both versions show in their respective columns
in the Properties window. If a new item is selected, that is, the item exists in right-
hand view, but not the left-hand, the properties for that item are listed in the right-
hand column and the left-hand column is empty.

The Properties commands allow you to customize the properties that are displayed
in the Properties window.

Alphabetic - Lists properties in alphabetical order. This button acts as a

toggle and is available when properties are displayed categorically.

Categorized - Displays properties grouped by specific categories.

Categories are defined and properties are assigned to those categories in Data
Dictionary Manager. This button acts as a toggle and is available when
properties are displayed alphabetically.

Show Modified - Toggles the display of only those properties that are different
between the properties that belong to a selected drawing item. This button applies
only to modified items that exist in both versions; for added and deleted items, all
properties are listed.

Change groups - Lists logical groupings of differences between the two versions.
Each group contains the smallest number of items possible while preserving logic of
the group. You can sort this list by clicking on any one of the following column
headings.

Checkbox column - Displays colors in the drawings as defined using

Compare Options. If not selected, the Default items color displays.
Number - Displays an arbitrary number that is assigned to a logical
change group when this dialog box is opened. The number has no
intrinsic meaning and may apply to a different group the next time you
open this dialog box.
Identifier - Lists item tags for the principal member of the change group, if an
item tag is assigned to that object. For instance, if a change group centers on
data differences for a vessel and its nozzles, then the item tag for the vessel is
displayed in this column.

Category - Displays the highest priority of categories that appear in the

Change details list for this group. The possible categories are data and
graphic listed in highest to lowest priority.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 269

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

Change details - Lists all the individual items that belong to the group that you select
from the Change groups list. You can sort this list by clicking on any one of the
following column headings.

Result - Displays one of three possible values: Left-Only, Right-Only, and

Different. Left-Only denotes an item that exists in the left-hand version only,
implying that the item is deleted from the right-hand version. Right-Only
denotes an item that exists in the right-hand version only, implying that the
item was added to the right-hand version. Different denotes a difference
between the properties or graphics of an item that exists in both versions.
Item Type - Displays the item type of the individual item in question.

Specific Item Type – Describes the item type in greater detail.

Item Tag - Displays the item tag of the individual item in question if a tag has
been assigned to the item.

Category - Displays the highest priority category of change that applies. The
possible categories are data and graphic listed in highest to lowest priority.
That is to say, that an item that is moved graphically (graphic category) but
also includes a property change (data category) lists "data" in its category
column.

Stockpile - Denotes whether the item is in the stockpile

View - Displays the status of the selected object in relation to their placement
in the primary or typical view, and between the selected versions. The
following statuses are displayed:

Status bar - Displays the currently defined colors for illustrating comparison status.
You can change the color scheme by clicking the Compare Options button on the
toolbar and defining options on the Compare Options dialog box.

Compare Options Dialog Box

The Compare Options Dialog Box opens when you click Compare Options on the
Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the various

270 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

comparison states are displayed in. The active color scheme is displayed in the
Compare dialog box status bar.

Left-only items - Allows you to choose a color for displaying objects that exist only
in the left-hand Drawing view. Dark green is the default color for this option.

Right-only items - Allows you to choose a color for displaying objects that exist only
in the right-hand Drawing view. Red is the default color for this option.

Different items - Allows you to choose a color for displaying items that exist in both
views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example, modified
properties, changed connectivity, and so forth). Blue is the default color for this
option.

Default items - Allows you to choose a color for displaying drawing items that are
identical in the two views. Black is the default color for this option.

Highlight items - Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is
highlighted, for instance, when an item is within your locate zone.

Selected items - Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one
or both of the Drawing views.

Background - Allows you to choose a background color for both drawing views.

Show Inconsistencies – If this box is checked, inconsistencies will display in both

drawing views.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 271

Comparing Drawing Versions – Drawing Manager

Compare With Dialog Box

Opens when you click Compare With on the Version History dialog box and allows
you to select a drawing version from a database other than the current active database
to compare against the version you choose on the Version History dialog box in the
active database.

Available Databases - Lists all the different databases that currently have a version
of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box.

History - Lists all the versions of the chosen drawing in the database you selected in
the Available Databases list.

272 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions

– SmartPlant P&ID
The Tools > Compare and Refresh allows you to refresh the active drawing with
data from another version of the drawing. The differences display in what is known
as a change group. If you accept the changes, the drawing refreshes to display the
changes.

Compare With Dialog Box

Opens when you click Tools > Compare and Refresh allowing you to select a
drawing version to compare against the version that you currently have open and
active.

Available Databases - Lists all the different databases that currently have a version
of the drawing you chose on the Show History dialog box. History - Lists all the
versions of the chosen drawing in the database you named in the Available
Databases list.

Compare and Refresh Dialog Box

Compare Options - Displays the Compare Options dialog box that allows you to
customize the display colors for items that differ between the two drawings being
compared.

Print - Prints the entire Compare and Refresh dialog box contents. You can also
specify to print either the right or left view by using the drop-down arrow to select
either Right View or Left View.

Generate Report - Displays a report in Microsoft Excel. The report contains the
differences between the compared versions. It lists information similar to what is
contained in the Change Groups and Change Details areas (number, identifier,
catergory, etc).

Find in List - Zooms to the Change groups and Change details list entry that
corresponds to an item you select in either Drawing view. Generally speaking, if you
select a drawing item that exists in the list, then the list display automatically zooms
to that entry.

Find in Drawing - Manipulates the Drawing views so that the selected element is
listed in the Change details and the Change groups list is centered in the appropriate
Drawing view.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 273

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Note:

Selected items in the Change Group or Change Details areas will only be
identified in the drawing view if the item resides in the currently displayed
view (Primary, Typical, or Both).

Zoom Area - Enlarges the display of an area in one or both Drawing views by
allowing you to draw a fence around that arbitrary area of the view..

Zoom In - Enlarges the display of items around a specified point in one or both
Drawing views.

Zoom Out - Reduces the display of items around a specified point in one or both
Drawing views.

Pan - Allows you to move the display in any direction from a specific point in
one or both Drawing views in order to see other areas of the view by dragging the
pointer across the display.

Select - Changes the pointer to an arrow allowing you to select an item.

Help – Displays Help for the Compare and Refresh dialog box.

Left Drawing View - Displays one version of your drawing. If you compare two
versions from different projects, the version that belongs to the other project appears
in the left-hand Drawing view. If you compare two versions from your active project,
then the older version appears in the left-hand Drawing view.

Right Drawing View - Displays the other version of your drawing. If you compare
two versions from different projects, the version that belongs to your active Drawing
Manager project appears in the right-hand Drawing view. If you compare two
versions from your active project, then the latest version appears in the right-hand
Drawing view.

A drop down list allows you to choose between Primary, Typical, and Both views of
the drawing for the Left and Right drawing view. Views can be chosen independently
for both versions of the drawing.

Properties Window - Displays two columns of properties for an item selected in a

Drawing view or in the Change details list. The left-hand and right-hand column
corresponds to the left-hand and right-hand Drawing views. If a deleted item is
selected (the item exists in left-hand view, but not the right-hand), the properties for
that item are listed in the left-hand column and the right-hand column is empty. If a
modified item is selected, values from both versions show in their respective columns
in the Properties window. If a new item is selected, that is, the item exists in right-
hand view, but not the left-hand, the properties for that item are listed in the right-
hand column and the left-hand column is empty.

274 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

The Properties commands allow you to customize the properties that are
displayed in the Properties window. Alphabetic or Categorized –
This toggle button displays the properties either alphabetically or grouped by
specific category. Alphabetic is available when properties are categorized and
Categorized is available when properties are displayed in alphabetical order.

Show Modified - Displays only properties whose values have changed

between the compared drawing versions.

Change groups - Area that lists the changed items in groups. A listed item contains
all the items this change effects.

Checkbox column - Displays colors in the drawings as defined using

Compare Options. If not selected, the Default items color displays.
Number - Displays an arbitrary number that is assigned to a logical
change group when this dialog box is opened. The number has no
intrinsic meaning and may apply to a different group the next time you
open this dialog box.
Action - Defines whether any action is to be taken involving the
selected change. If Refresh is chosen, any drawing changes in this
change group are applied to the open drawing version. In other words,
any changes that were made to the drawing are rolled back.
No Action - Validates Invalid Claims for the selected group (no
drawing changes are applied).
Refresh - Applies any drawing changes to the open drawing
version; and No Action - performs no action on the selected
drawing group.
Identifier - Lists item tags for the principal member of the change
group, if an item tag is assigned to that object. For instance, if a
change group centers on data differences for a vessel and its nozzles,
then the item tag for the vessel is displayed in this column.
Category - Displays the category of the change. Options include:
Data - Indicates that a property value has changed (for example, a
property value for a vessel).
Graphic - Indicates that a change has been made to an item in the
drawing (for example, a vessel has been moved).

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 275

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Change details - Lists all the individual items that belong to the group that you select
from the Change groups list. You can sort this list by clicking on any one of the
following column headings.
Result - Displays one of three possible values: Left-Only, Right-Only,
and Different. Left-Only denotes an item that exists in the left-hand
version only, implying that the item is deleted from the right-hand
version. Right-Only denotes an item that exists in the right-hand
version only, implying that the item was added to the right-hand
version. Different denotes a difference between the properties or
graphics of an item that exists in both versions.
Change - Describes which action is required to make the drawing in
the right frame match the drawing in the left frame. Actions include:
Add - Adds the listed item to the version on the right.
Delete - Removes the listed item from the version on the right.
Modify - Changes the listed item in the version on the right.
Item Type - Displays the item type of the individual item in question.
Specific Item Type - Describes the item type in greater detail.
Item Tag – Displays the item tag of the individual item in question if a
tag has been assigned to the item.
Category - Displays the highest priority category of the change that
applies.
Data - Indicates that a property value has changed (for example, a
property value for a vessel).
Graphic - indicates that a change has been made to an item in the
drawing (for example, a vessel has been moved).
Stockpile - Denotes whether the item is in the stockpile
View - Displays the status of the selected object in relation to their
placement in the primary or typical view, and between the selected
versions. The following statuses are displayed:

276 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Status bar - Displays the currently defined colors for illustrating comparison status.
You can change the color scheme by clicking the Compare Options button on the
toolbar and defining options on the Compare Options dialog box.

Compare Options Dialog Box

The Compare Options Dialog Box opens when you click Compare Options on
the Compare dialog box toolbar and allows you to customize the colors that the
various comparison states are displayed in. The active color scheme is displayed in
the Compare dialog box status bar.

Left-only - Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the
left-hand Drawing view only. Dark green is the default color for this option.

Right-only - Allows you to choose a color for the display of objects that exist in the
right-hand Drawing view only. Red is the default color for this option.

Different items - Allows you to choose a color for the display of items that exist in
both views but differ from each other for any number of reasons (for example,
modified properties). Blue is the default color for this option.

Default items - Allows you to choose a color for the display of drawing items that are
identical in the two views. Black is the default color for this option.

Highlight items - Allows you to choose a color to denote that a drawing object is
highlighted, for instance, when an item is within your locate zone.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 277

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Selected items - Allows you to choose a color to denote items that are selected in one
or both of the Drawing views.

Background - Allows you to choose a background color for both drawing views.

Show Inconsistencies – If this box is checked, inconsistencies will display in both

drawing views.

Compare and Refresh Drawing Versions

1. In SmartPlant P&ID, select Tools > Compare.
2. On the Compare With dialog box, select a database using the Available
databases drop-down list box.
3. In the History list box, select the drawing you want to compare your current
drawing with.
4. Select OK.
5. On the Compare and Refresh dialog box, review the information in the Change
groups and Change details areas. Your current drawing displays on the right
side of the screen. The version you are comparing it to displays on the left.
6. In the Change groups area, click in the Action column.
7. Using the drop-down list, select No Action, Refresh, or Validate. Validate will
display as an option only if you have an Invalid Claim.
8. Select OK to refresh the drawing and accept any changes or Cancel to dismiss the
dialog box.

278 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

 Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Compare and Refresh Examples

The following examples provide details for reconciling data and graphic differences
between your current drawing and a previously created version of that drawing.

Data Example
In this example, a vertical drum exists in the version to be selected for the compare.
The current version contains the same vertical drum but a change has been made to
the Cleaning Requirements property. When the current version is compared to the
selected version, a data change is found during the compare.

The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on
the left. Several change groups indicate that there are data changes to various items.
(The change to the Cleaning Requirement for the vessel propagated to the nozzles due
to system editing). Highlighting the vessel in the change groups‘ window displays
the corresponding change detail in the Change details window.

The change detail indicates the compare located a different property value
(Cleaning Requirement) in the current version. Clicking in the Action column of
the Change groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the new property
value). If you Refresh the version, the property value will be modified as shown in
the Change column. Note that you can refresh the property change to the vertical
drum and the nozzles individually. Inconsistencies will display in your drawing, if
you refresh the properties of the vertical drum but not the nozzles. Refreshing is an
undoable action.

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 279

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

Graphic Example
In this example, a vertical drum exists in the version to be selected for the compare.
The current version contains the same vertical drum but it has been moved to a new
location. When the current version is compared to the selected version, a graphic
change is found during the compare.

The current version appears on the right and the version it is compared to appears on
the left. A change group indicates there is only one group and a graphic change was
located. A change detail indicates the compare located a graphic modification to the
vertical drum in the current version. Clicking in the Action column of the Change
groups allows you to take no action or refresh (accept the previous location of the
vessel). The settings are not applied to a version until you click OK.

If you Refresh the change group, the vertical drum will be moved back to its previous
location. All other items in the same change group will also be moved back.

280 SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide

Comparing and Refreshing Drawing Versions – SmartPlant P&ID

SmartPlant P&ID Creating a P&ID Course Guide 281